651344

Triumph-Adler P-4531DN Manual

324
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/352
Next page
Operation Guide
P-4531DN
P-5031DN
P-5531DN
P-6031DN
i
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take
simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.
To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine own brand toner containers, which must
pass numerous quality inspections.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.
We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
The equipment's serial number is printed on the rear side of the printer in some regions.
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number
before contacting your Service Representative.
ii
Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Product Library disc
Quick Guide Describes the procedures for installation of the machine.
Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the
machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
Safety Guide (P-4531DN/
P-5031DN/P-5531DN/
P-6031DN)
Describes the machine installation space, cautionary space, and other
information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
Operation Guide (This
Guide)
Describes how to load paper, basic print operations, and troubleshooting.
Embedded Web Server RX
User Guide
Describes how to access the machine from a computer via a Web browser to
check and change settings.
Printing System Driver User
Guide
Describes how to install the printer driver and use printer functionality.
Network Tool for Direct
Printing Operation Guide
Describes how to use functionality for printing PDF files without launching Adobe
Acrobat or Reader.
NETWORK PRINT MONITOR
User Guide
Describes how to monitor the network printing system with NETWORK PRINT
MONITOR.
Card Authentication Kit(B)
Operation Guide
Describes how to authenticate to the machine using the ID card.
Data Security Kit(E)
Operation Guide
Describes how to install and configure the Data Security Kit.
PRESCRIBE Commands
Command Reference
Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).
PRESCRIBE Commands
Technical Reference
Describes PRESCRIBE command functionality and control for each type of
emulation.
Maintenance Menu User
Guide
Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print settings.
iii
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the
user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and
their meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated
inside the symbol.
... [General warning]
... [Warning of high temperature]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited
action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Warning of prohibited action]
... [Disassembly prohibited]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics
of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
... [Alert of required action]
... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are
illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
Note An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
iv
Contents
Legal and Safety Information ..................................................................................................................................vi
1 Machine Parts
Components at the Front/Right of the Printer ............................................................................................... 1-2
Components at the Front/Left of the Printer ................................................................................................. 1-2
Internal Components ....................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Components at the Rear of the Printer .......................................................................................................... 1-4
Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................................... 1-5
2 Preparation before Use
Changing Network Interface Parameters ....................................................................................................... 2-2
Configuring the Wireless Network ................................................................................................................. 2-7
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................................................................................................................................ 2-12
Printing a Status Page ................................................................................................................................... 2-16
Installing Software ......................................................................................................................................... 2-17
Status Monitor ................................................................................................................................................ 2-24
Embedded Web Server RX ............................................................................................................................ 2-28
Power On/Off .................................................................................................................................................. 2-35
Energy Saver Function .................................................................................................................................. 2-36
Loading Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 2-38
3Printing
Printing from Applications .............................................................................................................................. 3-2
Canceling a Printing Job ................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ............................................................................................................... 3-3
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .......................................................................................................... 3-4
Banner Printing ................................................................................................................................................ 3-5
Printer Driver Help ........................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) ...................................................................... 3-7
Printing Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 3-8
4 Operation Panel
Message Display .............................................................................................................................................. 4-2
Keys .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Using the Menu Selection System ................................................................................................................. 4-7
Setting a Mode Selection Menu ...................................................................................................................... 4-9
Report ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-10
USB Memory (USB memory selection) ........................................................................................................ 4-21
Counter (Viewing the counter value) ........................................................................................................... 4-29
Paper Settings ................................................................................................................................................ 4-30
Print Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 4-44
Network (Network settings) .......................................................................................................................... 4-60
Optional Network (Optional Network settings) ........................................................................................... 4-82
Device Common (Selecting/Setting the common device) .......................................................................... 4-93
Security (Security function setting) ........................................................................................................... 4-121
User/Job Account (User Login Setting/Job Account setting) ................................................................. 4-129
Adjust/Maint. (Adjust/Maintenance selection/setting) .............................................................................. 4-150
Op Functions (Optional application settings) ........................................................................................... 4-154
5 Document Box
Document Box .................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Custom Box ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Job Box ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-21
Computer Settings (Printer Driver) .............................................................................................................. 5-30
6 Status Menu
v
Displaying the Status Menu Screen ............................................................................................................... 6-2
Job Status ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Job Log ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-4
USB Keyboard .................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
Network ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
Wi-Fi .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-6
Wi-Fi Direct ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Option Network ................................................................................................................................................ 6-8
7 Maintenance
Toner Container Replacement ........................................................................................................................ 7-2
Replacing the Waste Toner Box ..................................................................................................................... 7-7
Cleaning the Printer ......................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Printer ........................................................................................... 7-11
8 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Error Messages ................................................................................................................................................ 8-6
Clearing Paper Jams ...................................................................................................................................... 8-18
Appendix................................................................................................................................................ A-1
Character Entry Method ..................................................................................................................................A-2
About the Options ............................................................................................................................................A-5
Expansion Memory Modules ...........................................................................................................................A-6
General Description of Options ......................................................................................................................A-7
Paper ...............................................................................................................................................................A-11
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................A-21
Glossary.................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1
vi
Legal and Safety Information
Notice on Software
SOFTWARE USED WITH THIS PRINTER MUST SUPPORT THE PRINTER'S EMULATION MODE. The printer is factory-
set to emulate the PCL.
Notice
The information in this guide is subject to change without notification. Additional pages may be inserted in future editions.
The user is asked to excuse any technical inaccuracies or typographical errors in the present edition.
No responsibility is assumed if accidents occur while the user is following the instructions in this guide. No responsibility is
assumed for defects in the printer's firmware (contents of its read-only memory).
This guide, any copyrightable subject matter sold or provided with or in connection with the sale of the page printer, are
protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide, any copyrightable
subject matter without the prior written consent of Copyright owner is prohibited. Any copies made of all or part of this guide,
any copyrightable subject must contain the same copyright notice as the material from which the copying is done.
Regarding Trade Names
• PRESCRIBE is a registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7, Windows
Server 2012, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of
International Typeface Corporation.
• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.
• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by Apple
Inc.
• Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
• Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The
designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
CAUTION NO LIABILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY IMPROPER INSTALLATION.
vii
License Agreements
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)
software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it under
the terms of GPL/LGPL.
Open SSL License
Copyright © 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://
www.openssl.org/)"
4 The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5 Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without
prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http:// www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as
to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following
conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The
SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
viii
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this
code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
ix
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as
well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions
of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal
purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of this
License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the fonts
on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multi-user license agreement which can be obtained from
Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights
are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary
information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to
and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You agree
that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License
may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not
remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you
shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as
requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with
Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular
purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is
repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential damages,
or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written
consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.
Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in
FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and
conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No
change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
x
Energy Saving Control Function
To reduce energy consumption while in a waiting state, the device comes equipped with an energy saving control function
for switching to a Sleep Mode where power consumption is automatically reduced to a minimum after a certain amount of
time elapses since the device was last used. For details, refer to Energy Saver Function on page 2-36.
Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of
no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For more information, refer to Sleep Timer (Sleep
timer timeout time) section.
There are two sleep modes: Quick Recovery and Energy Saver. The default setting is Energy Saver mode.
Quick Recovery Mode
The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver Mode. The machine automatically recovers and
prints when a job is detected.
Energy Saver Mode
Makes it possible to reduce energy consumption even further than with Quick Recovery Mode.
Power Off Timer (For Europe)
If the printer is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off. The Power Off Timer is used to set the time
until the power turns off. The factory setting for the time until the power turns off is 3 days.
Duplex Printing
This printer includes duplex printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two single-sided originals onto a single
sheet of paper as a duplex printing, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information refer to Duplex
(Setting the duplex printing) on page 4-46.
Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex mode
also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that machines
capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.
Resource Saving - Paper
For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper
certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002*1 or an
equivalent quality standard, be used.
This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m
2
paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to further
saving of forest resources.
*1: EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"
Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"
To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that automatically
activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time. Although it takes the machine a slight
amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a significant reduction in energy consumption is
possible.
It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.
xi
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR
®
)
We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this
product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
ENERGY STAR
®
is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the
use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing
ENERGY STAR
®
qualified products, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during
product use and cut energy-related costs.
EN ISO 7779
Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld
platziert werden.
Wireless Connection (Mexico only)
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped)
Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable, which
offers the advantage that a LAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can be
transmitted.
On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can pass
through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.
Secretly Viewing Communication Contents
A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the following
communication contents.
• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers
• Contents of email messages
Illegal Intrusion
A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the following
illegal actions.
• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)
• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information (spoofing)
• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)
• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)
xii
Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to
reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when the
product is used.
We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and that
they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the security
settings.
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)
• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical
institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and precautions
provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.
• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire
alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the
instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.
• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles or
this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy
including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please
use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and
redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in
applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,
nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in
these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
• Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
• Humidity: 15 to 80 %
However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. Avoid the following locations when selecting a site
for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.
During printing, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If, however, the
machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when printing an extremely large number of copies,
the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for print work, it is suggested that the room be
properly ventilated.
Interface connectors
IMPORTANT Be sure to power off the printer before connecting or disconnecting an interface cable. For protection
against static electricity discharge to the printer's internal electronics through the interface connector(s), cover any
interface connector that is not in use with the protective cap supplied.
Note Use shielded interface cables.
xiii
Cautions when Handling Consumables
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your
eyes and skin.
• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of
water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth out with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of
your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,
contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and
humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose
(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
xiv
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is
hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no
radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.
xv
About the Operation Guide
This Operation Guide has the following chapters:
Chapter 1 - Machine Parts
This chapter explains the names of parts.
Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the preparations and settings necessary before use and the method for loading paper.
Chapter 3 - Printing
This chapter explains the method for printing from a computer.
Chapter 4 - Operation Panel
This chapter explains how to use the operation panel to configure the printer.
Chapter 5 - Document Box
This chapter explains about the Document Box function.
Chapter 6 - Status Menu
This chapter explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print.
Chapter 7 - Maintenance
This chapter explains about the replacement of toner container and the cleaning of the printer.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems.
Appendix
This section explains the method for entering characters, an introduction to optional products and the printer specifications.
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions.
Convention Description Example
Italic Typeface
Used to emphasize a key word, phrase
or reference to additional information.
To replace the toner container, refer to Toner
Container Replacement on page 3-2.
Bold
Used to denote buttons on the
software.
To start printing, click OK.
Bracket Bold
Used to denote operation panel keys. Press [OK] to resume printing.
Note
Used to provide additional or useful
information about a function or feature.
Note Check with your network administrator
for the network address settings.
Important
Used to provide important information.
IMPORTANT Ensure paper is not folded, curled, or
damaged.
Caution
Indicates what must be observed to
prevent injury or machine breakdown
and how to deal with it.
CAUTION The fuser unit inside the printer
is hot. Do not touch it with your hands as it
may result in burn injury.
Warning
Used to alert users to the possibility of
personal injury.
WARNING If you ship the printer, remove
and pack the developer unit in a plastic bag
and ship them separately from the printer.
1-1
1 Machine Parts
This chapter contains explanations on the following topics:
Components at the Front/Right of the Printer..................................................................................... 1-2
Components at the Front/Left of the Printer ....................................................................................... 1-2
Internal Components ............................................................................................................................. 1-3
Components at the Rear of the Printer ................................................................................................ 1-4
Operation Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Machine Parts
1-2
Components at the Front/Right of the Printer
1 Paper Stopper
2 Top Tray
3 Paper Width Guides (MP tray)
4 MP (Multi-Purpose) Tray
5 Support Tray Section of the MP Tray
6 Cassette 1
7 Operation Panel
8 USB Memory Slot
9 Power Switch
10 Handholds
11 Paper Size Window
Components at the Front/Left of the Printer
1 Left Cover
2 Waste Toner Box
3 Handholds
6
9
8
1
2
7
10
3
5
4
11
1
2
3
1-3
Machine Parts
Internal Components
1 Top Cover
2 Toner Container
3 Lock Lever
4 Front Cover
5 Duplex Front Cover
6 Developer Unit
7 Registration Roller
8 Paper Width Guides
9 Paper Width Adjusting Tab
10 Paper Length Guide
11 Paper Length Adjusting Tab
12 Paper Size Dial
1
2
5
12
8
9
10
11
4
6
7
3
Machine Parts
1-4
Components at the Rear of the Printer
1 Option Interface Slot
2 Network Interface Connector
3 USB Port (For Card Authentication Kit)
4 USB Interface Connector
5 Interface Cover
6 Power Cord Connector Cover
7 Fuser Cover
8 Rear Cover
9 Power Cord Connector
10 Anti-theft Lock Slot
7
1
2
3
8
5
9
6
4
10
1-5
Machine Parts
Operation Panel
1 Ready Indicator
2 Energy Saver Indicator
3 Attention Indicator
4 Message Display
5 [Left Select] Key
6 [Logout] Key
7 [Menu] Key
8 [Back] Key
9 Numeric Keys
10 [Right Select] Key
11 [Cancel] Key
12 Arrow Keys
13 [OK] Key
14 [Clear] Key
15 [Document Box] Key
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
10
12
13
14
15
Machine Parts
1-6
2-1
2 Preparation before Use
This chapter contains explanations on the following topics:
Changing Network Interface Parameters............................................................................................. 2-2
Configuring the Wireless Network .......................................................................................................2-7
Setting Wi-Fi Direct.............................................................................................................................. 2-12
Printing a Status Page .........................................................................................................................2-16
Installing Software ............................................................................................................................... 2-17
Status Monitor ......................................................................................................................................2-24
Embedded Web Server RX.................................................................................................................. 2-28
Power On/Off ........................................................................................................................................2-35
Energy Saver Function........................................................................................................................ 2-36
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................................................2-38
Preparation before Use
2-2
Changing Network Interface Parameters
This printer supports TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPP, SSL Server and the IPSec protocols and Security Level.
The table below shows the items required for each of the settings.
Configure the printer's network parameters as appropriate for your PC and your network environment.
Menu Submenu Setting
Network Wired Netwk.
Set
TCP/IP
Settings
TCP/IP On/Off
IPv4 Setting DHCP On/Off
Auto-IP On/Off
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask IP address
Default Gateway IP address
IPv6 Setting IPv6 Setting On/Off
Manual
Settings
IP Address IP Address
Prefix
Length
0-128
Default
Gateway
IP Address
RA(Stateless) On/Off
DHCPv6 On/Off
LAN Interface Auto/10BASE-Half/
10BASE-Full/
100BASE-Half/
100BASE-Full/
1000BASE-T
Protocol
Settings
Bonjour Off/On On/Off
IPSec Off/On On/Off
NetBEUI Off/On On/Off
SNMPv3 Off/On On/Off
FTP(Server) Off/On On/Off
SNMP Off/On On/Off
SMTP Off/On On/Off
POP3 Off/On On/Off
RAW Port Off/On On/Off
LPD Off/On On/Off
IPP Off/On On/Off
Port Number 1 - 32767
IPP Over SSL Off/On On/Off
2-3
Preparation before Use
Network Settings
This section explains the settings for when DHCP is used or when an IP Address is entered while TCP(IPv4) is selected.
For details of the settings, refer to Network (Network settings) on page 4-60. Also, for how to use the Menu Selection
System, refer to Using the Menu Selection System on page 4-7.
1 While the printer displays Ready to print., Please wait. and
Processing., press [Menu]. The mode selection menu is
displayed.
2 Press or to select Network.
3 Press [OK]. The Network menu screen appears.
4 Press or to select Wired Netwk. Set.
Network Protocol
Settings
HTTP Off/On On/Off
HTTPS Off/On On/Off
LDAP Off/On On/Off
ThinPrint Off/On On/Off
Port Number 1 - 32767
ThinPrintOverSSL On/Off
WSD-PRINT Off/On On/Off
EnhancedWSD
(SSL)
Off/On On/Off
Enhanced
WSD
Off/On On/Off
Restart Network Yes/No
Security Network
Security
SSL Setting SSL Off/On On/Off
Note When the network settings have been changed, restart the network card of the device. This is mandatory to
make the settings effective. For details, refer to Restart Network (Restarting the network card) on page 4-81.
Note When entering an IP Address manually, check the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway with the
system administrator.
Menu Submenu Setting
Menu:
Counter
Exit
03
Paper Settings
02
01
Report
Network:
Host Name
Exit
Wired Netwk. Set
01
02
ProtocolSettings
03
Preparation before Use
2-4
5 Press [OK]. The Wired Netwk. Set menu screen appears.
Checking that TCP/IP is On
This is an explanation of the method for setting for IPv4, but TCP/IP should also be On when setting for IPv6.
6 Select TCP/IP Settings and press [OK]. The TCP/IP Settings
menu screen appears.
7 Press or to select TCP/IP.
8 Press [OK]. The TCP/IP screen appears.
9 Check that On is selected. If Off is selected, then press or to
select On.
10Press [OK]. The TCP/IP setting is set and the TCP/IP Settings
menu reappears.
Switching DHCP to Off or On
Select On when using a DHCP server to automatically obtain an IP Address. Select Off to enter an IP Address.
11Press or to select IPv4 Setting.
12
Press [OK]. The IPv4 Setting menu screen appears.
13
Press or to select DHCP.
Note "*" is displayed for the setting which has been
selected.
2-5
Preparation before Use
14
Press [OK]. The DHCP screen appears.
15
Press or to select Off or On.
16
Press [OK]. The DHCP setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu
reappears.
Entering the IP address
If DHCP is set to Off, enter the IP Address manually.
17
Press or to select IP Address.
18
Press [OK]. The IP Address screen appears.
19
Use the numeric keys or or to set the IP address.
You can set any value between 000 and 255.
Increase or reduce the figures by pressing or .
Use and to move the position being entered, which is shown
highlighted.
20
Press [OK]. The IP address is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu
reappears.
Entering the Subnet Mask
When DHCP is set to Off, enter the Subnet Mask manually.
21
Press or to select Subnet Mask.
22
Press [OK]. The Subnet Mask screen appears.
DHCP:
Off
01
On
02
*
IPv4 Setting:
DHCP
Exit
01
Auto-IP
02
IP Address
03
Note DHCP becomes effective when On is selected. Press
[Menu] to end the mode selection menu.
When Off is set, continue on to enter the IP Address.
IP Address:
0. 0. 0. 0
IPv4 Setting:
DHCP
Exit
01
Auto-IP
02
IP Address
03
Subnet Mask:
0. 0. 0. 0
Preparation before Use
2-6
23
Use the numeric keys or or to set the subnet mask.
You can set any value between 000 and 255.
The method for entering is the same as for the IP Address.
24
Press [OK]. The subnet mask setting is stored and the IPv4
Setting menu reappears.
Entering the Default Gateway
When DHCP is set to Off, enter the Default Gateway manually.
25
Press or to select Default Gateway.
26
Press [OK]. The Default Gateway screen appears.
27
Use the numeric keys or press or to set the default gateway.
You can set any value between 000 and 255.
The method for entering is the same as for the IP Address.
28
Press [OK]. The default gateway is stored and the IPv4 Setting
menu reappears.
This completes the network settings. Press [Menu] and end the
mode selection menu.
Note When the network settings have been changed, restart
the network card of the device. This is mandatory to make
the settings effective. For details, refer to Restart Network
(Restarting the network card) on page 4-81.
2-7
Preparation before Use
Configuring the Wireless Network
When the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36 and IB-51) is installed on the machine and the connection settings are
configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration methods are
as follows
Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device with
the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (Wi- Fi
Direct).
Configuration Method Description Reference Page
Configuring the Connection
from the Operation Panel on
This Machine
Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure the
network in details from System menu.
Wi-Fi Settings (Wi-Fi
Settings)...4-63
Wireless Network (Wireless
network settings)...4-83
Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
This is the tool included in the Product Library. You can
configure the connection according to the instructions
provided by the wizard.
Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup
Tool...2-7
Setting the Connection by
Using the Setup Utility of IB-
51
This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-51. You can
use it on both Windows and Mac OS.
IB-51 Operation Guide
Configuring Connections on
the Web Page
For the IB-51, the connection can be set from the
Embedded Web Server RX.
Embedded Web Server RX
User Guide
For the IB-51, the connection can be set on the dedicated
Web page.
IB-51 Operation Guide
Note For detail of the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36/IB-51), Contact your dealer or our sales or
service representatives.
• Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36)...A-8
• Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51)...A-7
When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network
Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36 or IB-51), select the desired setting on Primary
Network (Select the network interface to use) on page 4-80.
Note Before using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool, connect your computer to this machine locally with wired LAN cable or
Wi-Fi Direct.
To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to ON) and Restart Network from the
operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.
To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the
machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.
Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.
• Wi-Fi Settings (Wi-Fi Settings)...4-63
• Wireless Network (Wireless network settings)...4-83
Preparation before Use
2-8
Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable
1 Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the
machine is powered on.
2 Turn on the computer.
IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is
generated automatically.
3 Insert the Product Library disk.
4 Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement.
Click Accept.
5 Select Maintenance.
6 Select Wi-Fi Setup Tool.
7 Click Run.
8 Select Do not use automatic configuration.
9 Click Next twice.
10Select Use LAN cable.
11Click Next twice.
12Click Easy setup.
13Click Next.
The machine is detected.
Note Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged
on with administrator privileges.
If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog
box displays, select Cancel.
If the autorun screen is displayed, click Run setup.exe.
If the user account management window appears, click Yes
(Allow).
Note Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup
Tool. It may take times to search the machine.
If the machine is not detected, select Advanced setup > Next.
Select Express or Custom as device discovery method and
specify the IP address or host name to search the machine.
2-9
Preparation before Use
14Select the machine.
15Click Next.
16Select Use the device settings. on Authentication mode
17Enter the login user name and password (Login user name and
Password are both Admin.), and then click Next.
18Configure the communication settings and then click Next.
19Change the settings of access point as necessary and then click
Next.
The network is configured.
Preparation before Use
2-10
LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct
When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed in the machine, you can configure connection settings
using Wi-Fi Direct.
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Network.
3 Press [OK]. The Network menu screen appears.
4 In the Network menu, press or to select Wi-Fi Direct Set.
5 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct Set menu screen appears.
6 In the Wi-Fi Direct Set menu, press or to select Wi-Fi
Direct.
7 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct screen appears.
8 Press or to select On.
9 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct setting is set and the Wi-Fi
Direct Set menu reappears.
10Press [Back]. The Network Set menu reappears.
11In the Network menu, press or to select Restart Network.
12Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
13Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Restarting...
Please wait. appears and the network is restarted.
Network:
Host Name
Exit
Wi-Fi Direct Set
01
02
Wi-Fi Settings
03
Wi-Fi Direct Set:
Wi-Fi Direct
Exit
Device Name
01
02
IP Address
03
Wi-Fi Direct:
Off
01
On
02
*
Network:
Primary Network
Exit
Restart Network
06
08
Ping
07
Restart.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
2-11
Preparation before Use
14Insert the Product Library disk.
15Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement.
Click Accept.
16Select Maintenance.
17Select Wi-Fi Setup Tool.
18Click Run.
19Select Do not use automatic configuration.
20Click Next twice.
21Click Wi-Fi Direct.
22Click Next twice.
23Click Advanced setup.
24Click Next.
Select Express or Custom as device discovery method and specify
the IP address or host name to search the machine.
25Select the machine.
26Click Next.
27Select Use the device settings. on Authentication mode
28Enter the login user name and password (Login user name and
Password are both Admin.), and then click Next.
29Configure the communication settings and then click Next.
30Change the settings of access point as necessary and then click
Next.
The network is configured.
Note Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged
on with administrator privileges.
If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog
box displays, select Cancel.
If the autorun screen is displayed, click Run setup.exe.
If the user account management window appears, click Yes
(Allow).
Preparation before Use
2-12
Setting Wi-Fi Direct
If you are using the machine with the optional wireless interface kit attached, setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to print from
the Wi-Fi Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Network.
3 Press [OK]. The Network menu screen appears.
4 In the Network menu, press or to select Wi-Fi Direct Set.
5 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct Set menu screen appears.
6 In the Wi-Fi Direct Set menu, press or to select Wi-Fi
Direct.
7 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct screen appears.
8 Press or to select On.
9 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct setting is set and the Wi-Fi
Direct Set menu reappears.
10Press [Back]. The Network Set menu reappears.
11In the Network menu, press or to select Restart Network.
12Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
13Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Restarting...
Please wait. appears and the network is restarted.
Network:
Host Name
Exit
Wi-Fi Direct Set
01
02
Wi-Fi Settings
03
Wi-Fi Direct Set:
Wi-Fi Direct
Exit
Device Name
01
02
IP Address
03
Wi-Fi Direct:
Off
01
On
02
*
Network:
Primary Network
Exit
Restart Network
06
08
Ping
07
Restart.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
2-13
Preparation before Use
14Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld device.
If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the
machine, press [Yes] ([Left Select]).
The network between this machine and the handheld device is
configured.
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct
Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Network.
3 Press [OK]. The Network menu screen appears.
4 In the Network menu, press or to select Wi-Fi Direct Set.
5 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct Set menu screen appears.
6 In the Wi-Fi Direct Set menu, press or to select Wi-Fi
Direct.
7 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct screen appears.
8 Press or to select On.
9 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct setting is set and the Wi-Fi
Direct Set menu reappears.
10Press [Back]. The Network Set menu reappears.
11In the Network menu, press or to select Restart Network.
12Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
13Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Restarting...
Please wait. appears and the network is restarted.
Preparation before Use
2-14
14Press [Status] ([Left Select]). The Status menu screen appears.
15In the Status menu, press or to select Wi-Fi Direct.
16Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct menu is displayed.
17In the Wi-Fi Direct menu, press or to select Detail Info.
18Press [OK]. The Detail Info screen appears.
Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.
19Select Settings > Wi-Fi on your mobile device.
20Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 18 from the list.
21Enter the password that was provided in step 18.
22Press [Connect].
The network between this machine and the handheld device is
configured.
Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button
When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the network
using push button.
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Network.
3 Press [OK]. The Network menu screen appears.
4 In the Network menu, press or to select Wi-Fi Direct Set.
5 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct Set menu screen appears.
6 In the Wi-Fi Direct Set menu, press or to select Wi-Fi
Direct.
Status:
Network
Exit
03
Job Log
02
01
Job Status
Wi-Fi Direct:
Detail Info
03
02
01
PushButton Setup
ConnectionStatus
Detail Info
Detail
NetwkName(SSID) 2/ 6
Direct-KMxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Network:
Host Name
Exit
Wi-Fi Direct Set
01
02
Wi-Fi Settings
03
Wi-Fi Direct Set:
Wi-Fi Direct
Exit
Device Name
01
02
IP Address
03
2-15
Preparation before Use
7 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct screen appears.
8 Press or to select On.
9 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct setting is set and the Wi-Fi
Direct Set menu reappears.
10Press [Back]. The Network Set menu reappears.
11In the Network menu, press or to select Restart Network.
12Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
13Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Restarting...
Please wait. appears and the network is restarted.
14Press [Status] ([Left Select]). The Status menu screen appears.
15In the Status menu, press or to select Wi-Fi Direct.
16Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct menu is displayed.
17In the Wi-Fi Direct menu, press or to select PushButton
Setup.
18Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
19Press the push button on the computer or handheld device.
Preparation before Use
2-16
20Press [Next] ([Right Select]).
The network between this machine and the computer or handheld
device is configured.
IMPORTANT You can connect up to three handheld devices at
the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices that
support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other
device, disconnect the alreadyconnected devices from the
network. The disconnection methods are as follows:
• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer
• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
(ConnectionStatus...6-7)
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu
(Disconnect Timer (Setting the Disconnect Time)...4-63)
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Embedded Web
Server RX (Embedded Web Server RX User Guide)
Printing a Status Page
After completing the network settings, print a status page. The status page allows you to confirm a range of information,
including network addresses and network protocols.
To print a status page, select Report Print from the Report menu, and then select Status Page. Refer to Report
Print on page 4-10 for detailed information.
2-17
Preparation before Use
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine from your PC.
Software
You can use either Express Install or Custom Install can be selected for the installation method. Express Install is the
standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by Express Install, use Custom Install.
For details, refer to Custom Installation in the Custom Install on page 2-19.
Installing Printer Driver in Windows
Express Install
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using Express Install.
For details, refer to Custom Installation in the Custom Install on page 2-19.
1 Insert the Product Library disk.
Software Description
Express
Install
Printing System Driver This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.
Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by a
single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the
features of the machine.
Use this driver to create PDF files.
Printing System (XPS)
Driver
This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format
developed by Microsoft Corporation.
—
KPDL mini-driver/PCL
mini-driver
This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some
restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used
with this driver.
—
NETWORK PRINT
MONITOR
This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network. —
Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing
reporting function.
Network Tool for Direct
Printing
This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/
Reader.
—
FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be used in
a software application.
Note
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• Printing System (XPS) Driver cannot be installed on Windows XP.
Note Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged
on with administrator privileges.
If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog
box displays, select Cancel.
If the autorun screen is displayed, click Run setup.exe.
If the user account management window appears, click Yes
(Allow).
Preparation before Use
2-18
2 Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement.
Click Accept.
3 Select Express Install tab.
4 Select the device to be installed.
You can also select Use host name for port name and set to use the
host name of the standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be
used.)
IMPORTANT If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to
specify the IP address for the port name.
Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
5 Select the features you want to use with this device.
6 Click Install.
Note The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the
computer fails to detect the machine, verify that it is
connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and
that it is turned on and click (Reload).
Note If the Windows security window appears, click Install
this driver software anyway.
To install Status Monitor, it is necessary to install Microsoft
.NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
2-19
Preparation before Use
7 Finish the installation.
When Your software is ready to use appears, you can use the
software. To print a test page, click the Print a test page checkbox
and select the machine.
Click Finish to exit the wizard.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by
following the screen prompts. This completes the printer driver
installation procedure.
Custom Install
The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using Custom Install.
1 Insert the Product Library disk.
2 Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement.
Click Accept.
3 Select Custom Install tab.
4 Select the device to be installed, and click the arrow button to move
it to the Products to Install list.
Note When you have selected Device settings in Windows
XP, the dialog box for device setting will appear after Finish is
clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the
machine. Device settings can be configured after the
installation is completed.
For more information, refer to the Printing System Driver User
Guide.
Note Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged
on with administrator privileges.
If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog
box displays, select Cancel.
If the autorun screen is displayed, click Run setup.exe.
If the user account management window appears, click Yes
(Allow).
IMPORTANT If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to
specify the IP address for the port name.
Installation may fail if the host name is specified.
Note The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the
computer fails to detect the machine, verify that it is
connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and
that it is turned on and click (Reload).
If the desired device does not appear, select Add custom
device to directly select the device.
Preparation before Use
2-20
5 Select the driver to be installed, and then click the arrow button to
move it to the Products to Install list.
6 Click Utility tab and select the utility to be installed.
7 Click Install.
8 Finish the installation.
When Your software is ready to use appears, you can use the
software. To print a test page, click the Print a test page checkbox
and select the machine.
Click Finish to exit the wizard.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by
following the screen prompts. This completes the printer driver
installation procedure.
Note To install Status Monitor, it is necessary to install
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.
Note When you have selected Device settings in Windows
XP, the dialog box for device setting will appear after Finish is
clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the
machine. Device settings can be configured after the
installation is completed.
For more information, refer to the Printing System Driver User
Guide.
2-21
Preparation before Use
Uninstalling the Software
Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.
1 Click Search in charms, and enter Uninstall Product Library in the
search box. Select Uninstall Product Library in the search list.
2 Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.
Click Uninstall.
3 If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by
following the screen prompts. This completes the software
uninstallation procedure.
Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh
The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer.
The following is an explanation for installation in MAC OSX 10.9.
1 Insert the Product Library disk.
2 Double-click the GEN_LIB icon.
Note Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
Note In Windows 7, click Start button on the Windows and
then select All Programs, (name of offer company), and
Uninstall Product Library to display the Uninstall Wizard.
Note The software can also be uninstalled using the Product
Library disk.
In the Product Library installation screen, click Uninstall, and
follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.
Note Installation on MAC OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to KPDL or KPDL(Auto). For details, refer
to Emulation (Setting the emulation) on page 4-48.
If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings. For details, refer to ProtocolSettings
(Detailed settings for the network protocol) on page 4-78.
In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
Preparation before Use
2-22
3 Double-click OS X 10.5 or higher .
4 Double-click (Brand Name) OS X x.x.
5 The printer driver installation program starts up.
6 Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the
installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized
and connected.
If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
7 Open System Preferences and click Printers & Scanners.
2-23
Preparation before Use
8 Click the plus symbol (+) to add the installed printer driver.
9 Select Default and click the item that appears in Name.
Select the driver in Use and click Add.
10
Select the options available for the machine and click OK.
11
The selected printer is added.
Note When using an IP connection, click the IP icon for an IP
connection and then enter the IP address and printer name.
The number entered in Address will automatically appear in
Name. Change if needed.
Preparation before Use
2-24
Status Monitor
The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.
Accessing the Status Monitor
The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.
Exiting the Status Monitor
Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit manually:
Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit automatically:
The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.
Status Monitor Display
The display of the Status Monitor is as follows.
Quick View State
The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.
Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.
Note When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.
• Printing System Driver is Installed.
• Either Enhanced WSD or EnhancedWSD(SSL) are set to On in ProtocolSettings (Detailed settings for the
network protocol) on page 4-78.
Expand button
Alert Tab
Toner Status Tab
Paper Tray Status Tab
Printing Progress Tab
Settings icon
2-25
Preparation before Use
Printing Progress Tab
The status of the print jobs is displayed.
Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu
displayed with a right-click.
Paper Tray Status Tab
Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the
amount of paper remaining.
Toner Status Tab
The amount of toner remaining is displayed.
Alert Tab
If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.
Status icon
Job list
Preparation before Use
2-26
Status Monitor Context Menu
The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.
• Embedded Web Server RX
If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the Embedded
Web Server RX to modify or confirm the network settings. For more information, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX
User Guide.
This menu is not displayed when using USB connection.
• Notification…
This sets the display of the Status Monitor. For details, refer to Status Monitor Notification Settings on page 2-27.
• Exit
Exits the Status Monitor.
Settings icon
2-27
Preparation before Use
Status Monitor Notification Settings
The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.
Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.
1 Select Enable event notification.
If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even
when printing is executed.
2 Select an event to use with the text to speech function in Available
events.
3 Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.
Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.
When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud,
enter the texts in the text box.
Note The available file format is WAV.
Preparation before Use
2-28
Embedded Web Server RX
If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Embedded Web Server RX.
This section explains how to access Embedded Web Server RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.
For details on Embedded Web Server RX, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Settings that the administrator and general users can configure or check in Embedded Web Server RX are as follows.
Accessing Embedded Web Server RX
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the
host name.
Examples: https://10.180.81.2/ (for IP address)
https://DEVICE001 (if the host name is "DEVICE001")
The web page displays basic information about the machine and
Embedded Web Server RX as well as their current status.
Note To fully access the features of the Embedded Web Server RX pages, enter the User Name and Password
and click Login. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including
Document Box and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with
administrator privileges is shown below.
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
Setting Description
Administ-
rator
General
User
Device Information The machine's structure can be checked.
Job Status Displays all device information, including print jobs and job log history.
Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a
document box.
†
†
The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.
Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. —
Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings. —
Network Settings Configure the network advanced settings. —
Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings. —
Management
Settings
Configure the advanced management settings. —
Note Print the status page to check the machine's IP
address and the host name. For details, refer to Status Page
(Printing a printer's status page) on page 4-12.
Note If the screen There is a problem with this website's
security certificate. is displayed, configure the certificate.
For details on Certificates, refer to the Embedded Web
Server RX User Guide.
You can also continue the operation without configuring the
certificate.
2-29
Preparation before Use
3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.
Changing Security Settings
This section explains how to change the security settings.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the
host name.
3 Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator
privileges is shown below.
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case
sensitive).
4 From the Security Settings menu, select the setting you want to
configure.
Note To fully access the features of the Embedded Web
Server RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and
click Login. Entering the predefined administrator password
allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box
and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default
setting for the default user with administrator privileges is
shown below.
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case
sensitive).
Note Print the status page to check the machine's IP
address and the host name. For details, refer to Status Page
(Printing a printer's status page) on page 4-12.
Note The configurable settings within Device Security and
Network Security can also be configured from the
machine's operation panel. For details, refer to Operation
Panel on page 4-1.
For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Preparation before Use
2-30
Changing Device Information
Change the device information of the machine.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the
host name.
3 Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator
privileges is shown below.
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case
sensitive).
4 From the Device Settings menu, select System.
5 Enter the device information, and then click Submit.
E-mail Settings
Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send notification of the end of a Job via E-mail.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
In addition, configure the following.
• SMTP settings
Item: SMTP Protocol and SMTP Server Name in SMTP
• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails
Item: Sender Address in E-mail Send Settings
• The setting to limit the size of E-mails
Item: E-mail Size Limit in E-mail Send Settings
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
Note Print the status page to check the machine's IP
address and the host name. For details, refer to Status Page
(Printing a printer's status page) on page 4-12.
IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network or
turn the machine OFF and then ON.
To restart the network interface card, click Reset in the
Management Settings menu, and then click Restart Network in
Restart.
2-31
Preparation before Use
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the
host name.
3 Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator
privileges is shown below.
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case
sensitive).
4 From the Network Settings menu, click Protocol.
5 Set SMTP (E-mail TX) to On in the Send Protocols.
6 From the Function Settings menu, click E-mail.
Note Print the status page to check the machine's IP
address and the host name. For details, refer to Status Page
(Printing a printer's status page) on page 4-12.
Preparation before Use
2-32
7 Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.
8 Click Submit.
Setting Description
SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.
SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that SMTP Protocol is set to On. If
Off is set, click Protocol and set the SMTP protocol to On.
SMTP Server Name
†
Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. Use the SMTP default port 25.
SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication Protocol To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for authentication.
SMTP Security Set SMTP security.
Turn on SMTP Security in SMTP (E-mail TX) on the Protocol Settings page.
POP before SMTP
Timeout
Specify the time in seconds until the connection to the POP server times outs.
This can be set when POP before SMTP is selected in Authentication
Protocol.
Connection Test Tests to confirm that the settings are correct.
Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the Domain List and enter the domain names of
addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail
address.
POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only enable the function of
sending e-mail from the machine. Set the following items if you want to enable
the function of receiving e-mail on the machine. For more information, refer to
Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Check Interval
Run once now
Domain Restriction
POP3 User Settings
E-mail
Send
Settings
E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When E-mail
size is greater than this value, an error message appears and E-mail sending is
cancelled. Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If
not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size
limit.
Sender Address
†
Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails, such as the
machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 128
characters.
Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of
the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The
maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.
Function Defaults Change the function default settings in Common/Job Default Settings page.
†
Be sure to enter the items.
2-33
Preparation before Use
Creating a New Custom Box
You can register a custom box from Embedded Web Server RX.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the
host name.
3 From the Document Box menu, click Custom Box.
4 Click Add.
5 Enter the box details.
Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. For
details on the fields to populate, refer to Embedded Web Server RX
User Guide.
6 Click Submit.
Printing a Document Stored in a Custom Box
A document stored in a Custom Box can be printed from Embedded Web Server RX.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the
host name.
Note To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.
Note Print the status page to check the machine's IP
address and the host name. For details, refer to Status Page
(Printing a printer's status page) on page 4-12.
Note Print the status page to check the machine's IP
address and the host name. For details, refer to Status Page
(Printing a printer's status page) on page 4-12.
Preparation before Use
2-34
3 From the Document Box menu, click Custom Box.
4 Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document
is stored.
5 Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.
6 Click Print.
For settings that are configurable, refer to Embedded Web Server RX
User Guide.
2-35
Preparation before Use
Power On/Off
Power On
1 Press the Power switch.
IMPORTANT When turning off the power switch, do not turn on the
power switch again immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then
turn on the power switch.
Power Off
1 Press the Power switch.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed.
It takes about 3 minutes for power off.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Preparation before Use
2-36
Energy Saver Function
Sleep
For Europe
When the set time (factory setting is 1 minute) elapses after the printer is last used, the printer automatically enters sleep
mode. The message display backlight and lights turn off to minimize power consumption. This status is referred to as Sleep.
To use the printer, press [OK]. The printer will be ready to use within 18 seconds.
For more information about configuring settings, refer to Sleep Timer (Sleep timer timeout time) on page 4-110.
Except for Europe
When the set time (factory setting is 1 minute) elapses after the printer is last used, the printer automatically enters sleep
mode. The message display backlight and lights turn off to minimize power consumption. This status is referred to as Sleep.
There are two sleep modes: Quick Recovery and Energy Saver. The default setting is Energy Saver mode.
Quick Recovery Mode
The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver mode.
The message display goes off when sleep mode is entered and the Ready indicator flashes.
The machine recovers quickly when [OK] is pressed. The machine also automatically recovers and prints when a job is
detected.
If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is performed while the message display remains unlit.
To use the printer, press [OK].
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
For more information about configuring settings, refer to Sleep Timer (Sleep timer timeout time) on page 4-110.
Energy Saver Mode
This mode reduces power consumption even more than quick recovery mode, and allows Sleep mode to be set separately
for each function.
To use the printer, press [OK].
Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows.
• P-5531DN/P-6031DN: 25 seconds or less
• P-5031DN: 20 seconds or less
• P-4531DN: 15 seconds or less
For more information on Energy Saver settings, refer to Sleep Level Set. (Sleep level setting) on page 4-108.
Power Off Timer (for Europe)
If the printer is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off. The Power Off Timer is used to set the time
until the power turns off. The factory setting for the time until the power turns off is 3 days.
IMPORTANT You can set the power off rule and power off timer. For details, refer to Power Off Rule (Power Off Rule
setting) (for Europe) on page 4-110 and Power Off Timer (Power off timer settings) (for Europe) on page 4-111.
IMPORTANT Cautions when setting the Energy Saver mode
• An ID card is not recognized when in Energy Saver mode.
2-37
Preparation before Use
In case of not using the printer for an extended period of time
CAUTION Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
CAUTION If this printer will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power
switch. If the printer will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power
plug from the outlet as a safety precaution.
Preparation before Use
2-38
Loading Paper
The following explains the procedure for loading paper in the cassette and the MP tray.
Loading Paper into the Cassette
The cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
Cassette 1 to 5 hold up to 500 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m
²).
For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to Selecting the Right Paper on page A-13. For the paper type setting, refer
to Media Type (Setting the cassette paper type) on page 4-37.
1 Fan the media (paper/transparencies), then tap it on a level surface
to avoid media jams or skewed printing.
2 Pull out the cassette from the machine.
IMPORTANT You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such papers may
cause paper jams or other faults.)
The cassettes can hold paper with weight between 60 - 120 g/m².
Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 120 g/m² in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is
heavier than 120 g/m².
Place the cassette in a stable place such as on a desk when loading paper.
Note A6 can only be used in Cassette 1 of the P-5031DN/P-5531DN/P-6031DN.
B6 and Postcard cannot be used in Cassette 1 of the P-4531DN.
Cassette
IMPORTANT When pulling out the cassette from the machine,
ensure that it is supported and does not fall out.
2-39
Preparation before Use
3 (On P-4531DN only) Press the bottom plate down until it locks.
4 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and
right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab and
slide the guides to the paper size required.
5 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
Bottom Plate
Paper Width
Adjusting Tab
Paper Width
Guides
Note Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
Paper Length Guide
Paper Length
Adjusting Tab
Preparation before Use
2-40
If you are going to use paper that is longer than A4-R, pull the
cassette out until it stops at the back and then adjust the paper length
guide to the paper size required.
6 Turn the Paper Size Dial so that the size of the paper you are going
to use appears in the Paper Size Window.
7 Load the paper in the cassette.
Note Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
Paper Size Dial
Paper Size Window
Note When the Paper Size Dial is set to Other the paper size
must be set into the printer on the operation panel. Refer to
Cassette (1 to 5) Set. (Settings for the cassettes) on page 4-
32.
2-41
Preparation before Use
8 Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the machine. Push it straight
in as far as it will go.
9 Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded in the cassette.
(Refer to Media Type (Setting the cassette paper type) on page 4-33.)
Load Limit
Clip
IMPORTANT Load the paper with the print side facing down.
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded.
Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams.
Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit (see
the illustration on the left).
Set the stack of paper so that it is under the clips (see the
illustration on the left).
The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper
size. Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may
cause skewed feeding and paper jams.
Note If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period,
protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the
cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
Preparation before Use
2-42
Loading Paper into the MP (Multi-Purpose) Tray
The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 plain paper (80 g/m²).
For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to Selecting the Right Paper on page A-13. For the paper type setting, refer
to Media Type (Paper type setting for the MP tray) on page 4-31.
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.
• A4 plain paper (80 g/m²): 100 sheets
• Hagaki: 1 sheet
• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 5 sheets
• Folio: 20 sheets
• Thick paper: 5 sheets
1 Fan the media (paper/transparencies), then tap it on a level surface
to avoid media jams or skewed printing.
2 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops.
IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled paper), always specify the media
type setting. If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m² or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of
the paper you are using.
Note When you load custom size paper, select Custom size by referring to Paper Size (Paper size setting for
the MP tray) on page 4-30
.
When you use special paper such as envelopes or thick paper, select the media type by referring to
Media Type
(Paper type setting for the MP tray) on page 4-31
.
MP Tray
2-43
Preparation before Use
3 Pull out the support tray section of the MP tray.
4 Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray. Standard
paper sizes are marked on the MP tray. For standard paper sizes,
slide the paper width guides to the corresponding mark.
5 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go.
6 Set the MP tray paper size on the printer’s operation panel. Refer to
MP Tray Set. (MP tray settings) on page 4-30.
Support Tray Section
of the MP Tray
Level Indicator
IMPORTANT When loading the paper, keep the print side facing
up.
Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there
is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading
the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the
multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-
over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides,
readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed
feeding and paper jams.
Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
Preparation before Use
2-44
Loading Envelopes
5 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.
Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows.
When you load envelopes or Hagaki (cardstock) in the multi purpose tray
Load envelope with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide.
When you load envelopes in the bulk feeder
You can load envelopes in the bulk feeder (PF-3100). How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) is same as that of
loading in the multi purpose tray.
Acceptable Envelope Size
Youkei 2 114 × 162 (mm)
Youkei 4 105 × 235 (mm)
Envelope Monarch 3 7/8" × 7 1/2"
Envelope #10 4 1/8" × 9 1/2"
Envelope DL 110 × 220 (mm)
Envelope C5 162 × 229 (mm)
Executive 7 1/4" × 10 1/2"
Envelope #9 3 7/8" × 8 7/8"
Envelope #6 3 5/8" × 6 1/2"
Oufukuhagaki
(Return postcard)
Portrait form
envelopes
Landscape form
envelopes
Close
the flap.
Hagaki
(Cardstock)
Open
the flap.
IMPORTANT Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki (return postcard).
How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to load it in
correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
Note When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Media Type
(Paper type setting for the MP tray) on page 4-31.
2-45
Preparation before Use
Paper stopper
When using paper larger than A4-R/Letter-R, open the paper stopper as
shown in the figure.
Preparation before Use
2-46
3-1
3Printing
This chapter contains explanations on the following topics:
Printing from Applications.................................................................................................................... 3-2
Canceling a Printing Job....................................................................................................................... 3-2
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen.....................................................................................................3-3
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ................................................................................................ 3-4
Banner Printing ......................................................................................................................................3-5
Printer Driver Help ................................................................................................................................. 3-7
Printing Functions ................................................................................................................................. 3-8
Printing
3-2
Printing from Applications
This section provides basic instructions for printing documents. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear
in Windows 8.1. To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied
Product Library disk.
Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
1 Create a document using an application.
2 Select Print in the application menu. The Print dialog box appears.
3 Click the next to the Name field and select this machine from the
list.
4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box. Enter
any number up to 999.
When there is more than one page, select Collate to print out one by
one in the sequence of the page numbers.
5 Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
6 Select the Basic tab and click Print size to select the print size.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency,
click Media type menu and select the media type.
7 Click Source and select the paper source.
8 Select paper orientation, either Portrait or Landscape, to match the
orientation of the document.
9 Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.
10
Click OK to start printing.
Canceling a Printing Job
1 While the printer displays Processing., press [Cancel].
The Job Cancel List appears, showing the list of current print
jobs.
2 Press or to display the desired job and then press [OK].
When the Job will be canceled. Are you sure? message
appears, press [Yes] ([Left Select]) to cancel the job or [No]
([Right Select]) to cancel this operation and continue printing.
When you cancel a job, Canceling... appears on the message
display and printing stops after the page currently printing has been
fed output.
Note Refer to Installing Software on page 2-17.
Note If you choose Auto source selection, paper is supplied
automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of
optimum size and type. To print on special paper such as
envelopes or thick paper, place it on the multi purpose tray and
select MP Tray.
3-3
Printing
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings. For more information, refer
to the Printing System Driver User Guide on the Product Library disk.
No. Description
1
Quick Print
Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it
changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
Basic
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size, media type,
destination, and duplex.
Layout
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode, poster
printing, and scaling.
Imaging
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality and grayscale adjustment of the print results.
Publishing
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
Job
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used
documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can be
printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don't
want others to see.
Advanced
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
2
Profiles
Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it is a convenient
practice to save frequently used settings.
3
Reset
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
2
1
3
Printing
3-4
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper
When cardstock or an envelope is loaded in the Multi Purpose Tray, set the paper size and type and then register the paper size
on the Basic tab of the print settings screen in the printer driver.
Once registered, the paper size can be selected from the Page size menu.
1 Display the print settings screen.
2 Click the Basic tab.
3 Click Page Sizes... to register the size.
4 Click New.
5 Enter the name of the paper.
6 Enter the paper size.
7 Click Save.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Print size menu, Select the page size (name) registered in
steps 4 to 8.
10
Select MP Tray in the Source menu.
11
Select the type of paper in the Media type menu.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
3-5
Printing
Banner Printing
When a document length from 470.5 mm (18.53") to a maximum of 915mm (36.03") is specified for printing, the print job is
treated as banner printing.
1 Display the print settings screen.
2 Click the Basic tab.
3 Click Page Sizes... to register the size.
4 Click New.
5 Enter the name of the paper.
6 Enter the length (470.5 mm (18.53") or longer), and width of the
custom paper size being registered.
7 Click Save.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Print size menu, Select the page size (name) registered in
steps 4 to 8.
10
Select MP Tray in the Source menu.
11
Select the type of paper in the Media type menu.
12Click OK.
Max. number of sheets
1 sheet (manual feed)
Paper width
210 mm to 216 mm (8.27" to 8.51")
Paper length
470.5 mm to 915 mm (18.53" to 36.03")
Paper weight
120 to 163 g/m
2
Media type
Heavy 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Note When KPDL is used for "PDL" Settings of the printer
driver, a length setting of 470.5 mm (18.53") or longer is
handled as banner print.
Printing
3-6
13Click OK.
When you execute printing in this case, a message appears on the
machine's operation panel. Place the paper in the Multi Purpose tray,
continue to support it so that it does not fall, and press [Continue]
([Right Select]). To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
IMPORTANT After pressing [Continue] ([Right Select]), support
the paper with both hands so that it feeds in correctly.
After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does
not fall. When using the inner tray as the output location, do not stand
up the stopper.
Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed
when printing multiple banner sheets.
• Msg Banner Print (Check setting before banner printing)...4-120
Use MP tray to print
on following paper.
Continue
Plain
Custom
3-7
Printing
Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn more about print settings, display the printer driver print settings screen and display Help
using either of the methods explained below.
• Click the ? button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click
the item you want to know about.
• Click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your
keyboard.
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when printing. For
the settings, refer to Printing System Driver User Guide.
1 In charms on Desktop, click Settings, Control Panel, and then
Devices and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click Printer
properties menu of the printer driver.
3 Click Preferences on the General tab.
4 Select the default settings and click OK.
2 1
Printing
3-8
Printing Functions
This section explains the useful functions which can be set with the Printer Driver. For more information, refer to the Printing
System Driver User Guide.
Half Speed Mode (Printer Driver Settings)
Half speed mode reduces the print speed to half the rated speed. When selected, the toner adheres better when printing
on small size, thick, or textured paper. In addition, you can select the half speed mode to feed thick paper smoothly and
avoid the paper jam. This mode may result in quieter printing.
Line Thinning (Printer Driver Settings)
Line thinning reduces the pen width of lines used for barcodes and line drawings. Drawing values controlled by an
application are not changed.
Correct Fine Line by Device
Enable correction of pen width by device. This feature is available only on supported models.
Custom Box (Optional Feature)
Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval.
You can create or delete a Custom Box, and data can be exchanged in various ways. To use a Custom Box, an optional
SSD must be installed in the printer.
For more details on Custom Box operation, refer to Custom Box on page 5-3.
Job Box (Optional Feature)
Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print, Stored Job, Quick Copy
and Proof and Hold which will be discussed later.
Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box. These Job Boxes
cannot be created or deleted by a user.
For more details on Job Box operation, refer to Job Box on page 5-21.
Note Half speed mode applies to all media types except Transparency and Vellum.
Item Description
Off Line thinning is not applied.
Barcodes This setting reduces the pen width value for vertical and horizontal lines. It improves the
readability of barcodes.
Fine lines This setting reduces the pen width value for vertical, horizontal, and diagonal lines.
All This setting reduces the pen width by a value of 1 for vertical, horizontal, and diagonal line
used in barcodes or line drawings.
Note Line thinning is available when PCL XL is selected in the PDL Settings dialog box. When GDI compatible
mode is selected in the PDL Settings dialog box, Line thinning is not available.
3-9
Printing
ThinPrint Activation (Optional Feature)
This printer can select whether or not to communicate using ThinPrint.
For more details on operation, refer to Op Functions (Optional application settings) on page 4-154.
Secure Pull Printing (Optional Feature)
Secure Pull Printing is a printing feature where a user pulls the print job to a printer selected after the job is spooled in a
server. To use this feature, the following system environments are required.
The Authentication server: aQrate (Optional Software) must be installed.
ID card and ID card reader: they are used to register and authenticate a user.
The Spooler server: it sends the print job to a selected printer after the user logs in.
For more details, contact your dealer or service representative.
Printing by Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google and does not require a printer driver. This service enables a
user with a Google account to print from a machine connected to the Internet.
The machine can be configured in the Embedded Web Server RX. Refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the wireless
LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly on a peer to
peer basis.
The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.
When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by specifying
the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.
When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.
Note A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.
It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be
registered from a PC connected to the same network.
6. The user pulls
the print job from
the selected printer.
5. The spooler
server sends the
print job to the
selected printer.
2. The spooler server
receives the print job.
1. A user sends
the print job to the
spooler server.
4. The Authentication
Server confirms the
login information
registered.
3. The user logins to the
printer or other MFP via
an Authentication Server
using an ID card.
Printing
3-10
4-1
4 Operation Panel
This chapter contains explanations on the following topics:
Message Display ....................................................................................................................................4-2
Keys ........................................................................................................................................................4-4
Using the Menu Selection System ....................................................................................................... 4-7
Setting a Mode Selection Menu ............................................................................................................ 4-9
Report ...................................................................................................................................................4-10
USB Memory (USB memory selection) ..............................................................................................4-21
Counter (Viewing the counter value) .................................................................................................4-29
Paper Settings......................................................................................................................................4-30
Print Settings........................................................................................................................................ 4-44
Network (Network settings) ................................................................................................................ 4-60
Optional Network (Optional Network settings) ................................................................................. 4-82
Device Common (Selecting/Setting the common device)................................................................4-93
Security (Security function setting) .................................................................................................4-121
User/Job Account (User Login Setting/Job Account setting) .......................................................4-129
Adjust/Maint. (Adjust/Maintenance selection/setting)....................................................................4-150
Op Functions (Optional application settings) .................................................................................4-154
Operation Panel
4-2
Message Display
Messages indicating the status of the various printer operations are displayed on the message display.
Status Information
Error Codes
For information on error code and errors where the printer requires the operator's attention, refer to Error Messages on page
8-6.
Message Meaning
Please wait. The printer is warming up and is not ready.
When the printer is switched on for the first time, this message will take several minutes.
Please wait.
Loading paper.
The paper in the cassette is being moved to a position where paper feed is possible. This
message is sometimes displayed for a short period when the cassette is returned to its
original position, for example, after paper is added.
Note This message is not displayed on P-4531DN.
Please wait.
Adding toner...
Toner is currently being replenished. This message may be displayed during continuous
printing of a large volume of pages which require a large amount of toner such as with
photographs, etc.
Ready to print. The printer is ready to print.
Processing. The printer is receiving data to print. This is also shown when the printer is reading an SD
card, USB memory, SSD or RAM disk.
Sleeping... The printer is in Sleep. The printer wakes from Sleep whenever a print job is received.
Canceling... Jobs inside the printer are being canceled. To cancel a job, refer to Canceling a Printing
Job on page 4-4.
4-3
Operation Panel
Indicators in Message Display
Ready, Data, and Attention Indicators
The following indicators light during normal operation and whenever the printer needs attention. Depending on the status
of lighting, each indicator has the following meaning:
Indicator Description
Flashing. Receiving data, processing data, accessing memory, or clearable error has occurred.
For details, refer to Troubleshooting on page 8-1.
On. Indicates that the printer is ready and on-line. The printer prints the data it receives.
Off. Indicates that the printer is off-line because printing is manually stopped or automatically
stopped due to an error condition. Data can be received but will not be printed. For details, refer to
Error Messages on page 8-6 if printing is automatically stopped when an error condition has
occurred.
On. The printer is in Sleep. The printer wakes from Sleep whenever a print job is received. The
printer then warms up and goes on-line.
For details on Sleep, refer to Sleep Timer (Sleep timer timeout time) on page 4-110.
Flashing. If Please wait is displayed, the printer is warming up.
Or, the printer cannot print for some reason (e.g. there is no paper in the cassette). Check the
message display and carry out the required action. For details, refer to Error Messages on page 8-6.
On. The printer cannot print due to an error. Check the message display and carry out the required
action. For details, refer to Error Messages on page 8-6.
Ready to print.
A4 A4
Status
Toner
Operation Panel
4-4
Keys
The operation panel keys are used to configure the printer operation. Note that certain keys have a secondary function.
Cancel Key
This key is used to:
• Cancel a printing job.
• Stop the alarm sound.
Canceling a Printing Job
1 While the printer displays Processing., press [Cancel].
The Job Cancel List appears, showing the list of current print
jobs.
2 Press or to display the desired job and then press [OK].
When the Job will be canceled. Are you sure? message
appears, press [Yes] ([Left Select]) to cancel the job or [No]
([Right Select]) to cancel this operation and continue printing.
When you cancel a job, Canceling... appears on the message
display and printing stops after the page currently printing has been
fed output.
Logout Key
• If user control is set then please log out by pressing [Logout] after operations are completed.
Menu Key
• [Menu] lets you enter the menu system to change the setup and printing environment of the printer.
Back Key
• Cancels the menu setting currently displayed and returns to the menu for the previous step.
4-5
Operation Panel
Arrow Keys
• The four arrow keys are used in the menu system to access an item or enter numeric values.
OK Key
• Finalize settings of numeric values and other selections.
Numeric Keys
• Enter numbers and symbols.
Clear Key
• Clears entered numbers and characters.
Document Box Key
• Press this key when using Document Box. For details, refer to Document Box on page 5-1.
Operation Panel
4-6
Left Select Key / Right Select Key
• These keys only function when the respective key tabs are shown in the message display. Pressing the key executes
the function shown in the message display.
Pressing the key executes the function shown in the message display.
E.g.:
When the menu shown below is displayed, pressing [Left Select] ([Yes]) prints the file selected. Pressing [Right Select]
([No]) stops printing and returns to the menu for the previous step.
• These keys only function when the paper jam message has appeared on the message display. A help message will
then appear to facilitate jam clearing in the location.
Print.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Menu Map
4-7
Operation Panel
Using the Menu Selection System
Menu Selection System
This section explains how to use the menu selection system.
[Menu] on the operation panel allows you to use the menu to configure the printer settings to your specific needs. Settings
can be made when Ready to print., Please wait., Processing. or Sleeping... is indicated on the printer
message display.
Entering the Mode Selection Menu
Press [Menu] when Ready to print. is indicated on the printer message display.
The mode selection menu is displayed.
Note Settings that are received from application software and the printer driver will take priority over settings made
in the operation panel.
Paper Source:
MP Tray
01
Cassette 1
02
*
Ready to print.
A4 A4
Status
Toner
Scroll page
Scroll line
An asterisk (*) is displayed
to the left of the currently
selected setting.
The directions of usable
arrow keys are shown on
the screen displayed.
Print Settings:
MP Tray Priority
Exit
03
Auto Cass.Change
02
01
Paper Source
Operation Panel
4-8
Selecting a Menu
The mode selection menu is hierarchical. Press , , or to display the desired menu.
• If [
a
] appears in the top-right of the screen, you can use the and
to scroll up and down through the menu options one line at a time,
and the and to move between menu options one page at a time.
• If [
P
] appears in the top-right of the screen, you can use the and
to switch between pages.
To return to the menu one level up, press [Back].
Setting a Menu
Select the desired menu and press [OK]. You can now select options in
the menu. Press , , or to select or enter the desired setting and
then press [OK] to confirm your selection.
If you are choosing from a list of settings, an asterisk (*) is displayed to
the left of the currently selected setting.
Canceling Menu Selection
If you press [Menu] when a menu is selected, the message display returns to Ready to print.
Menu:
Counter
Exit
03
Paper Settings
02
01
Report
Detail:
1/ 4File Name:
Detail
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
Media Type:
Plain
01
Preprinted
02
*
Bond
03
4-9
Operation Panel
Setting a Mode Selection Menu
This section explains the setting procedures used for each menu item in the mode selection menu.
1 While the printer displays Ready to print., Please wait.,
Processing. and Sleeping..., press [Menu]. The mode
selection menu is displayed.
2 Each time you press or , the selection changes.
• Report...4-10
• USB Memory...4-21
• Counter...4-29
• Paper Settings...4-30
• Print Settings...4-44
• Network...4-60
• Optional Network...4-82
• Device Common...4-93
• Security...4-121
• User/Job Account...4-129
• Adjust/Maint. ...4-150
• Op Functions...4-154
Note Optional Network is only displayed when a
Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface
Kit (IB-51) is installed as an option.
USB Memory is only displayed when USB memory is
installed.
Operation Panel
4-10
Report
These are the settings for printing reports and sending the Job Log History. The options available in the Report menu are
as follows:
• Report Print...4-10
• Job Log History (Sending Job Log History)...4-16
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Report.
3 Press [OK]. The Report menu appears.
Report Print
Prints a report. The options available in the Report Print menu are as follows:
• Menu Map (Printing a menu map)...4-10
• Status Page (Printing a printer's status page)...4-12
• Font List (Printing a list of the printer's fonts)...4-14
• RAM File List (Printing a list of the files on the RAM disk)...4-15
• SSD File List (Printing a list of the files on the SSD)...4-15
• SD Card FileList (Printing a list of the files on an SD card)...4-15
1 In the Report menu, press or to select Report Print.
2 Press [OK]. The Report Print menu appears showing a list of the
types of report that can be printed. Note that report types shown may
vary depending on which optional units are installed in the printer.
Menu Map (Printing a menu map)
The printer prints a full list of the menu selection system menu map.
1 In the Report Print menu, press or to select Menu Map.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Accepted. appears and
the printer prints the menu map.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Report Print menu
without printing the menu map.
Report:
Report Print
Exit
Job Log History
01
02
Note When user login administration is enabled, Job Log
History is displayed when logged in with administrator
authority.
Report Print:
Font List
Exit
03
Status Page
02
01
Menu Map
Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set,
the screen for entering Job Accounting information is
displayed. Enter the Account ID and press [OK].
Print.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Menu Map
4-11
Operation Panel
Menu Map Sample
Note It is possible to use the numeric keys to enter the Menu
number and display the settings required.
e.g.: Displaying the Menu Map printing menu
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press [1] on the Numeric Keys. The Report menu appears.
3 Press [1] on the Numeric Keys. The Report Print menu
appears.
4 Press [1] on the Numeric Keys. A confirmation message is
displayed.
Menu Map
Printer
Firmware version
Operation Panel
4-12
Status Page (Printing a printer's status page)
You can check the printer's current status and option settings by printing a status page.
1 In the Report Print menu, press or to select Status Page.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Accepted. appears and
the printer prints the status page.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Report Print menu
without printing the status page.
Understanding the Status Page
The numbers in the following diagram refer the items explained below the diagram. The items and values on the status page
may vary depending on the printer’s firmware version.
Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set,
the screen for entering Job Accounting information is
displayed. Enter the Account ID and press [OK].
Print.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Status Page
Network
Memory
Emulation
Counters
Data Sanitization
Toner Gauge
Interface BlockPaper Settings
Print Settings
Option Status
Device Common Settings
Status Page
Printer
Firmware version
Group Settings
2
3
4
6
1
7
8
10
5
9
4-13
Operation Panel
1 Firmware Version
This item shows the version and release date of the printer
firmware.
2 Printer Settings Information
This item shows various printer settings for hardware-related
items:
- MP tray paper size and type
- Paper cassette size and type
- Copies
- KIR mode
- Resolution
- Sleep level
- Sleep time
- Power off time
- Form feed timeout time
- MP tray empty
3 Installed Options
This item shows the options installed in the printer:
- Paper Feeder
-SD card
-SSD
- Card Authentication Kit(B)
- Data Security Kit(E)
-UG-33
4 Network Status
This item shows the IP address, subnet mask address, and
default gateway address for the network interface card in the
printer.
5 Interface Information
This information shows the block status for items including the
USB memory slot and USB interface. When connected by
network interface card (NIC), block status is shown for an
optional interface.
6Memory
This item shows:
- Standard memory in the printer
- Option memory slot status in megabytes
- Total memory in the printer
- Current status of the RAM disk
7Emulation
This item shows all available emulations of the printer. The
PCL 6 emulation is set as the default when the printer is shipped
from the factory. The emulations are:
-PCL 6
-KPDL
- Line Printer
- IBM Proprinter
- EPSON LQ-850
Operation Panel
4-14
8 Page Information
This shows counter information. Total printed page count and
total page count of each paper size.
9 Data Sanitization
The status of the Data Sanitization implementation is displayed.
10 Consumable Status
This item shows the approximate level of remaining toner. When
the value is 100, the toner container is full. The closer to 0, the
smaller the amount of remaining toner.
Font List (Printing a list of the printer's fonts)
To help you decide in selecting a font, you can printout lists of the internal fonts or the optional fonts.
1 In the Report Print menu, press or to select Font List.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Accepted. appears and
the printer prints the font list.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Report Print menu
without printing the font list.
Font List Sample
Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set,
the screen for entering Job Accounting information is
displayed. Enter the Account ID and press [OK].
Print.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Font List
4-15
Operation Panel
RAM File List (Printing a list of the files on the RAM disk)
This allows you to print a list of the files on the RAM disk.
1 In the Report Print menu, press or to select RAM File
List.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Accepted. appears and
the printer prints a list of the files held in the RAM disk.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Report Print menu
without printing the RAM disk file list.
SSD File List (Printing a list of the files on the SSD)
This allows you to print a list of the files on the SSD.
1 In the Report Print menu, press or to select SSD File
List.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Accepted. appears and
the printer prints a list of the files held on the SSD.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Report Print menu
without printing the SSD file list.
SD Card FileList (Printing a list of the files on an SD card)
This allows you to print a list of the files on an SD card.
1 In the Report Print menu, press or to select SD Card
FileList.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). Accepted. appears and the printer
prints a list of the files held on the
SD card.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Report Print menu
without printing the
SD card file list.
IMPORTANT This is displayed when RAM Disk Mode is set to On.
Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set,
the screen for entering Job Accounting information is
displayed. Enter the Account ID and press [OK].
IMPORTANT This is only displayed when the printer has an optional SSD installed and the drive is correctly
formatted.
Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set,
the screen for entering Job Accounting information is
displayed. Enter the Account ID and press [OK].
IMPORTANT This message will be displayed only when the SD card is installed in the printer and properly formatted.
Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set,
the screen for entering Job Accounting information is
displayed. Enter the Account ID and press [OK].
Operation Panel
4-16
Job Log History (Sending Job Log History)
This sets the sending of the Job Log History.
The options available in the Job Log History menu are as follows:
• Auto Sending (Automatic Sending of Job Log History)...4-16
• Send History (Sending job log history)...4-17
• Destination (Setting the destination)...4-18
• Subject (Setting job log subject)...4-19
• Personal Info. (Personal information setting)...4-20
1 In the Report menu, press or to select Job Log History.
2 Press [OK]. The Job Log History menu appears.
Auto Sending (Automatic Sending of Job Log History)
This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destination whenever a set number of jobs has been
logged. Set the destinations in advance by referring to Destination (Setting the destination) on page 4-18.
1 In the Job Log History menu, press or to select Auto
Sending.
2 Press [OK]. The Auto Sending menu appears.
3 Press or to select Off/On.
4 Press [OK]. The Off/On screen appears.
5 Press or to select On or Off.
6 Press [OK]. The Auto Sending is set and the Job Log History
menu reappears.
If On is selected, continue on and select the settings.
7 Press or to select Auto Sending.
Note When user login administration is enabled, Job Log History is displayed when logged in with
administrator authority.
To send E-mail from this machine, set the SMTP setting to On. For details, refer to the ProtocolSettings (Detailed
settings for the network protocol) on page 4-78.
It is necessary to register a mail server. For the method for setting the server, refer to the section on Embedded Web
Server RX on page 2-28.
Job Log History:
Destination
Exit
03
Send History
02
01
Auto Sending
Note If something other than Show All is set at Disp.
Status/Log (Display Status/Log setting) (page 4-117), then
the log in screen appears. Enter the login user name and
password, and press [Login] ([Right Select]).
Auto Sending:
Exit
01
Off/On
Off/On:
Off
01
On
02
*
Job Log History:
Destination
Exit
03
Send History
02
01
Auto Sending
4-17
Operation Panel
8 Press [OK]. The Auto Sending menu appears.
When Auto Sending is set to On in step 5, the setting for Jobs is
displayed.
9 Press or to select Jobs.
10Press [OK]. The Jobs screen appears.
11Use the numeric keys or press or to specify the number of job
log histories.
12
Press [OK]. The setting is stored and the Job Log History menu
reappears.
Send History (Sending job log history)
You can also send the job log history to the specified destination manually. Set the destinations in advance by referring to
Destination (Setting the destination) on page 4-18.
1 In the Job Log History menu, press or to select Send
History.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
This message appears if no destination has been set.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Accepted. appears and
the printer sends the job log history.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Job Log History
menu without sending the job log history.
Operation Panel
4-18
Destination (Setting the destination)
Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.
The options available in the Destination menu are as follows:
• Address Entry (Entering an e-mail address)...4-18
• Confirmation (Checking and editing the destination)...4-18
1 In the Job Log History menu, press or to select
Destination.
2 Press [OK]. The Destination menu appears.
Address Entry (Entering an e-mail address)
Enter the destination to which log histories are sent.
1 In the Destination menu, press or to select Address
Entry.
2 Press [OK]. The Address Entry screen appears.
3 Enter the address using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. Register the destination and the Job Log History
menu reappears.
If the destination has already been registered, the message Dest.
is already registered. Do you want to overwrite?
appears.
Press [Yes] ([Left Select]) to overwrite the destination. Pressing
[No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Destination menu without
overwriting the destination.
Confirmation (Checking and editing the destination)
Check and edit the registered destination.
1 In the Destination menu, press or to select Confirmation.
2 Press [OK]. The Dest. Confirm. screen appears. Check the
destination.
Destination:
Confirmation
Address Entry
01
02
Address Entry:
Text
ABC
Note Up to 128 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Dest. Confirm.:
Exit
aaa@bbb.com
4-19
Operation Panel
3 To edit the destination, press [OK].
4 Press or to select Edit.
5 Press [OK].
6 Enter the address using the numeric keys.
7 Press [OK].
8 To delete the destination, press [OK].
9 Press or to select Delete.
10Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
11To proceed with deleting the destination, press [Yes] ([Left Select]).
Completed. appears and the account is deleted.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Dest. Confirm.
menu without deleting the destination.
Subject (Setting job log subject)
Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.
1 In the Job Log History menu, press or to select Subject.
2 Press [OK]. The Subject screen appears.
Note Up to 128 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Operation Panel
4-20
3 Enter the subject using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. The subject is set and the Job Log History menu
reappears.
Personal Info. (Personal information setting)
Select whether to include personal information in the job log.
1 In the Job Log History menu, press or to select Personal
Info..
2 Press [OK]. The Personal Info. screen appears.
3 Press or to select Include or Exclude.
4 Press [OK]. The setting is stored and the Job Log History menu
reappears.
Note Up to 60 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Personal Info.:
Include
01
Exclude
02
*
4-21
Operation Panel
USB Memory (USB memory selection)
This specifies the settings for removing the USB memory and printing USB memory content.
The USB Memory menu automatically appears when you install the USB memory.
The options available in the USB Memory menu are as follows:
• Print File (Printing and checking the files in the USB memory)...4-21
Display of File List...4-21
Print File (Printing the selected file)...4-22
• Print Function Settings...4-23
Quiet Mode (Selecting the Quiet Mode)...4-23
Duplex (Setting the duplex printing)...4-23
EcoPrint (Selecting the EcoPrint mode)...4-24
File Name Entry (Entering a file name)...4-24
JobFinish Notice (Setting for notification when jobs are finished.)...4-25
Encrypted PDF (Entering the PDF password)...4-26
TIFF/JPEG Size (Adjusting the TIFF/JPEG file print out size)...4-26
XPS FitTo Page (Adjusting the XPS file print out size)...4-27
• Detail (Shows the details of the selected file)...4-27
• Remove Memory (Removing the USB memory)...4-28
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select USB Memory.
3 Press [OK]. The USB Memory menu appears showing a list of
available actions.
Print File (Printing and checking the files in the USB memory)
This displays a list of the files and folders in the USB memory. You can print the select file. You can also view the details of
the selected file or folder.
The options available in the Print File menu are as follows:
• Display of File List...4-21
• Print File (Printing the selected file)...4-22
Display of File List
1 In the USB Memory menu, press or to select Print File.
2 Press [OK]. File List appears showing a list of the files and folders in
the USB memory.
If there are 4 or more files and folders, pressing or repeatedly
scrolls up or down through the list.
IMPORTANT This message is only displayed when the USB host block and USB Storage block are set to Unblock.
For more information, please refer to I/F Block Set. (External interface block setting) on page 4-123.
Operation Panel
4-22
Press or to select a folder and then press [OK].
The folders and files in the selected folder are displayed.
Print File (Printing the selected file)
You can use this to specify printing for files in the USB memory.
1 Use the procedure described in Print File (Printing and checking the
files in the USB memory) on page 4-21 to display a list of the files in
the folder containing the file you want to print.
2 Press or to select the file you want to print.
3 Press [OK]. The Copies menu screen appears.
4 To print 2 or more copies, Use the numeric keys or press or to
set the number of copies to be printed.
5 Press [OK]. The Paper Source menu screen appears.
6 Press or to select the tray containing the paper you want to use.
7 Press [OK]. The message Accepted. appears and printing begins.
Folder-1
Detail
Folder-11
File-2.tif
File-3.pdf
IMPORTANT Print File only shows the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS
and OpenXPS files in the USB memory. Up to 3 folder levels can
be displayed. Depending on the USB memory capacity and the
number of files, the list may take some time to appear.
Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set,
the screen for entering Job Accounting information is
displayed. Enter the Account ID and press [OK].
Copies:
(1 - 999)
Function
copies1
Paper Source:
A4
Function
A4
A3
Labels
Plain
Plain
Note [Function] ([Right Select]) can be pressed to
change the print settings. For details, refer to Print Function
Settings on page 4-23.
Accepted.
4-23
Operation Panel
Print Function Settings
When printing, the print settings can be changed.
Options available in Print Function Settings are as follows:
• Quiet Mode (Selecting the Quiet Mode)...4-23
• Duplex (Setting the duplex printing)...4-23
• EcoPrint (Selecting the EcoPrint mode)...4-24
• File Name Entry (Entering a file name)...4-24
• JobFinish Notice (Setting for notification when jobs are finished.)...4-25
• Encrypted PDF (Entering the PDF password)...4-26
• TIFF/JPEG Size (Adjusting the TIFF/JPEG file print out size)...4-26
• XPS FitTo Page (Adjusting the XPS file print out size)...4-27
Quiet Mode (Selecting the Quiet Mode)
Lower print speed for quiet processing. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable. For details, refer to Quiet
Mode (Setting the Quiet Mode) on page 4-150.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select Quiet Mode.
3 Press [OK]. The Quiet Mode screen appears.
4 Press or to select On or Off.
5 Press [OK]. The Quiet Mode is set and the Function menu
reappears.
Duplex (Setting the duplex printing)
Set duplex printing. For details, refer to Duplex (Setting the duplex printing) on page 4-46.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select Duplex.
3 Press [OK]. The Duplex screen appears showing the list of available
duplex printing modes.
Note The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode.
This cannot be used when Prohibit is set for Each Job (Permission for settings for each jobs) on page 4-151.
Operation Panel
4-24
4 Press or to select the desired duplex printing mode.
The message display toggles through the following:
Off
Bind Long Edge
Bind Short Edge
Selecting Off disables duplex printing.
5 Press [OK]. The duplex printing mode is set and the Function menu
reappears.
EcoPrint (Selecting the EcoPrint mode)
Set EcoPrint mode. For details, refer to EcoPrint (Selecting the EcoPrint mode) on page 4-53.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select EcoPrint.
3 Press [OK]. The EcoPrint screen appears.
4 Press or to select the EcoPrint mode.
5 Press [OK]. The EcoPrint mode is set and the Function menu
reappears.
File Name Entry (Entering a file name)
Enter the file name. The file name entered is displayed as the Job Name in the Job Status and Job Log.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select File Name Entry.
3 Press [OK]. The File Name Entry screen appears.
4 Enter the file name using the numeric keys.
Function:
EcoPrint
03
Duplex
02
01
Quiet Mode
EcoPrint:
Off
01
On
02
*
Function:
EcoPrint
03
Duplex
02
01
Quiet Mode
File Name Entry:
Text
doc
ABC
Note Up to 32 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
4-25
Operation Panel
5 Press [OK]. The Additional Info. screen appears.
6 Press or to select from the additional information that can be set
for the file name.
The following settings can be selected.
• None (No additional information is added.)
• Date (To add the date.)
• Job No. (To add the Job Number.)
• Job No. + Date (To add the Job Number and date.)
• Date + Job No. (To add the date and Job Number.)
7 Press [OK]. Register the file name and the Function menu
reappears.
JobFinish Notice (Setting for notification when jobs are finished.)
Notification that a job has finished is sent by E-Mail.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select JobFinish Notice.
3 Press [OK]. The JobFinish Notice screen appears.
4 Press or to select the condition for notification.
The following settings can be selected.
• Off (no notification)
• Finished only (notification only when job finishes)
• Finished + Intrp
(Notification when job finishes or is interrupted)
5 Press [OK]. The Address Entry screen appears.
Note To send E-mail from this machine, set the SMTP setting to On. For details, refer to the ProtocolSettings
(Detailed settings for the network protocol) on page 4-78.
It is necessary to register a mail server. For the method for setting the server, refer to the section on Embedded Web
Server RX on page 2-28.
Operation Panel
4-26
6 Enter the address to be notified.
7 Press [OK]. Register the address and the Function menu
reappears.
Encrypted PDF (Entering the PDF password)
The password of a PDF file can be entered.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select Encrypted PDF.
3 Press [OK]. The Password entry screen appears.
4 Enter the password for the PDF file.
5 Press [OK] to enter the password and the Function menu
reappears.
TIFF/JPEG Size (Adjusting the TIFF/JPEG file print out size)
Use this setting to select the printing method used when TIFF or JPEG files are printed directly.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select TIFF/JPEG Size.
3 Press [OK]. The TIFF/JPEG Size screen appears.
The options available in TIFF/JPEG Size are as follows:
• Paper Size
Images are resized so that they fill the paper size when printed.
• Image Resolution
Image files are printed at the resolution specified in the
resolution information. Images with no resolution information are
printed using the Paper Size setting.
Note Up to 128 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
When user login administration is enabled, the address of the
administrator or machine administrator is entered.
Function:
EcoPrint
03
Duplex
02
01
Quiet Mode
Password:
Text
ABC
Note Up to 256 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page A-
2.
Function:
EcoPrint
03
Duplex
02
01
Quiet Mode
TIFF/JPEG Size:
Paper Size
01
Image Resolution
02
*
Print Resolution
03
4-27
Operation Panel
• Print Resolution
Images are printed using a 1-to-1 correspondence between the
image file pixels and printed dots. For example, the printed size
of a 600 × 300-pixel image file is 1 inch × 1/2 inch.
4 Press or to select whether TIFF/JPEG Size mode is enabled.
5 Press [OK]. The TIFF/JPEG Size setting is set and the Function
menu reappears.
XPS FitTo Page (Adjusting the XPS file print out size)
Select On in this setting to enlarge or reduce XPS files to fit the printable area during printing.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select XPS FitTo Page.
3 Press [OK]. The XPS FitTo Page screen appears.
4 Press or to select whether XPS FitTo Page mode is enabled.
5 Press [OK]. The XPS FitTo Page setting is set and the Function
menu reappears.
Detail (Shows the details of the selected file)
Use this to view detailed information on the files and folders in the USB memory.
1 Use the procedure described in Print File (Printing and checking the
files in the USB memory) on page 4-21 to display a list of the files or
folders you want to check.
2 Press or to select the folder or file you want to check.
3 Press [Detail] ([Right Select]). The Detail screen appears.
If you selected a file, there are 4 Detail screens. Press or to
move between the screens.
If you selected a folder, there are 2 Detail screens. Press or to
move between the screens.
Pressing [OK] while file or folder details are displayed returns you to
the Print File menu.
Note Images are automatically rotated during printing to
provide a closer match between the aspect ratios of the
image file and the paper used for printing.
Operation Panel
4-28
If the entire name shown as the File Name or Folder Name will
not fit on one line, pressing [Detail] ([Right Select]) changes to a
3-line name display. If the name is 3 or more lines long, you can scroll
up or down by pressing or .
Pressing [OK] twice while file or folder details are displayed returns
you to the Print File menu.
Remove Memory (Removing the USB memory)
Allows you to remove a USB memory device.
1 In the USB Memory menu, press or to select Remove Memory.
2 Press [OK]. The printer is now ready for the USB memory to be
removed and the message display returns to Ready to print.
IMPORTANT If the screen on the left appears, the USB memory is
still being used. Wait until the relevant job (e.g. printing from the USB
memory) has ended and then repeat the Remove Memory procedure.
Detail:
1/ 4File Name:
Detail
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
Detail:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU
VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz1234567890
Cannot remove the
memory while in use.
4-29
Operation Panel
Counter (Viewing the counter value)
This only displays the total number of pages printed. You cannot change the displayed number.
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Counter.
3 Press [OK]. The Counter menu screen appears.
4 Press or to select by Paper Size, by Duplex, or by
Combine.
5 Press [OK]. The number of printed pages for the function selected is
displayed.
Operation Panel
4-30
Paper Settings
This sets the paper size and type for the MP tray and cassettes from which paper is supplied.
The options available in Paper Settings are as follows:
• MP Tray Set. (MP tray settings)...4-30
• Cassette (1 to 5) Set. (Settings for the cassettes)...4-32
• Bulk Feeder Set. (Settings for the optional bulk paper feeder)...4-37
• Media Type Set. (Paper type settings)...4-39
• Reset Type Adj. (Resets customized settings)...4-42
• Paper Setup Msg(Check setting when loading paper)...4-43
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Paper Settings.
3 Press [OK]. The Paper Settings menu appears showing a list of
available options.
MP Tray Set. (MP tray settings)
To print correctly on paper supplied from the MP tray, use the procedure below to set the paper size and media type.
The options available in MP Tray Set. menu are as follows:
• Paper Size (Paper size setting for the MP tray)...4-30
• Media Type (Paper type setting for the MP tray)...4-31
Paper Size (Paper size setting for the MP tray)
You can use this to set the paper size that can be supplied from the MP tray.
For more information about the paper sizes that you can feed from the MP tray, refer to Minimum and Maximum Paper
Sizes on page A-12.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select MP Tray
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The MP Tray Set. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Paper Size.
Paper Settings:
MP Tray Set.
Exit
01
Cassette 1 Set.
02
Media Type Set.
03
Note Feeding the paper having a paper size which does not match the current paper size from the MP tray can
cause paper jam.
MP Tray Set.:
Exit
Media Type
02
01
Paper Size
4-31
Operation Panel
4 Press [OK]. The Paper Size screen appears listing the paper sizes
that can be supplied from the MP tray.
The available paper sizes are as follows:
Envelope Monarch
Envelope #10
Envelope DL
Envelope C5
Executive
Letter
Legal
A4
B5
A5-R
A5
A6
B6
Envelope #9
Envelope #6
ISO B5
Custom
Hagaki
Oufukuhagaki
Oficio II
216x340mm
16K
Statement
Folio
Youkei 2
Youkei 4
5 Press or to select the desired paper size.
6 Press [OK]. The paper size for the MP tray is set and the MP Tray
Set. menu screen reappears.
Media Type (Paper type setting for the MP tray)
You can use this to set the paper type that can be supplied from the MP tray.
For more information about paper types that you can feed from the MP tray, refer to Paper on page A-11.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select MP Tray
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The MP Tray Set. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Media Type.
Operation Panel
4-32
4 Press [OK]. The Media Type screen appears listing the media types
that can be supplied from the MP tray.
The available media types are as follows:
Plain
Transparency
Preprinted
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Vellum
Rough
Letterhead
Color
Prepunched
Envelope
Cardstock
Thick
High Quality
CUSTOM 1 to 8
5 Press or to select the desired media type.
6 Press [OK]. The media type for the MP tray is set and the MP Tray
Set. menu screen reappears.
Cassette (1 to 5) Set. (Settings for the cassettes)
To print correctly on paper supplied from the cassettes, use the procedure below to set the paper size and media type.
Set the cassette according to the paper size.
• Setting the standard paper size...4-32
• Setting the non-standard paper size...4-34
The options available in Cassette (1 to 5) Set. menu are as follows:
• Media Type (Setting the cassette paper type)...4-33
• Other Paper Size (Setting the Paper Size from the Operation Panel)...4-34
• Custom PaperSize (Setting a Custom Paper Size)...4-35
Setting the standard paper size
To set the standard sizes A5, A4, B5, Letter, Legal and A6 (paper cassette), the following operations are necessary.
• Setting the cassette paper size...4-33
• Media Type (Setting the cassette paper type)...4-33
Media Type:
Plain
01
Transparency
02
*
Preprinted
03
4-33
Operation Panel
Setting the cassette paper size
To set the standard sizes for the paper cassette, load the paper and turn the paper size dial so that the size of the paper
you are going to use appears in the paper size window. To adjust the paper width guides and the paper length guide of the
paper cassette, refer to Loading Paper into the Cassette on page 2-38.
If the PF-320 optional paper feeder is installed, use the same procedure to load paper into the paper feeder cassettes.
1 Pull the cassette out of the printer and set the paper size using the
paper size dial.
2 Adjust the paper guides in the cassette to the size of the paper to be
used for printing and load the paper into the cassette.
Media Type (Setting the cassette paper type)
By setting a paper type (plain, recycled, etc.) for the paper cassette, you can automatically select the paper in the paper
cassette according to the paper type you command on the printer driver.
If the PF-320 optional paper feeder is installed, use the same procedure to setting the cassette paper type.
For more information about paper types that you can feed from the paper cassette, refer to Paper Specifications on page
A-11.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select the cassette
you want to set.
2 Press [OK]. The Cassette # Set. menu screen appears.
# shows the number of the cassette installed in the printer (1 to 5).
3 Press or to select Media Type.
4 Press [OK]. The Media Type screen appears listing the media types
that can be used with the selected cassette.
The available Media Types are as follows:
Plain
Preprinted
Bond
Recycled
Rough
Letterhead
Color
Prepunched
High Quality
CUSTOM 1 to 8
5 Press or to select the desired media type.
6 Press [OK]. The media type for the cassette is set and the Cassette
# Set. menu screen reappears.
Paper Size Dial
Operation Panel
4-34
Setting the non-standard paper size
To set the non-standard sizes (sizes other than A5, A4, B5, Letter, Legal and A6 (paper cassette), the following operations
are necessary.
• Selecting the Size Dial Setting...4-34
• Other Paper Size (Setting the Paper Size from the Operation Panel)...4-34
• Custom PaperSize (Setting a Custom Paper Size)...4-35
• Media Type (Setting the cassette paper type)...4-37
Selecting the Size Dial Setting
1 Pull the cassette out of the printer and set the paper size dial to Other.
For details, refer to step 1 in Setting the cassette paper size on page
4-33.
2 Adjust the paper guides in the cassette to the size of the paper to be
used for printing and load the paper into the cassette.
Other Paper Size (Setting the Paper Size from the Operation Panel)
Use the operation panel to set the size of paper loaded in the cassette on the printer.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select the paper
cassette assigned to Other on the Size Dial.
2 Press [OK]. The Cassette # Set. menu screen appears.
# shows the number of the cassette installed in the printer (1 to 5).
3 Press or to select Other Paper Size.
4 Press [OK]. The Other Paper Size screen appears listing the
paper sizes that can be used in the cassette.
The available paper sizes are as follows:
Envelope Monarch (#1)
Envelope #10 (#1)
Envelope DL (#1)
Envelope C5 (#1)
Executive
Letter
Legal
A4
B5
A5-R
A5
A6 (#2)
B6 (#3)
Envelope #9 (#1)
Envelope #6 (#1)
ISO B5
Custom
Note When Custom is selected, it is possible to enter the paper size. For details, refer to Custom PaperSize
(Setting a Custom Paper Size) on page 4-35.
Cassette 1 Set.:
Exit
Other Paper Size
02
01
Media Type
Other Paper Size:
Legal
05
A4
06
*
B5
07
4-35
Operation Panel
Oufuku Hagaki (#3)
Oficio II
216x340mm
16K
Statement
Folio
Youkei 2 (#1)
Youkei 4 (#1)
#1 Only when optional paper feeder PF-320 is installed.
#2 Cassette 1 for the P-5031DN, P-5531DN and P-6031DN.
#3 Cassette 1 except for the P-4531DN.
5 Press or to select the desired paper size.
6 Press [OK]. The paper size for the cassette is set and the Cassette
# Set. menu screen reappears.
If you selected Custom in step 4, use the procedure below to specify
the paper length and width.
Custom PaperSize (Setting a Custom Paper Size)
In the procedure below, select the units to be used for entering the custom paper size and then enter the paper width and
length. As shown in the figure, enter the Y and X values for the paper size, using the selected units.
1 In the Cassette # Set. menu, press or to select Custom
PaperSize.
# shows the number of the cassette installed in the printer (1 to 5).
Note When Custom is selected, it is possible to enter the
paper size. For details, refer to Custom PaperSize (Setting a
Custom Paper Size) on page 4-35.
X Dimension
Y Dimension
Cassette:
105 to 216 mm (4.13 to 8.5 inches)
Paper Feeder PF-320:
92 to 216 mm (3.62 to 8.5 inches)
Cassette:
148 to 356 mm (5.83 to 14.02 inches)
Paper Feeder PF-320:
162 to 356 mm (6.38 to 14.02 inches)
Operation Panel
4-36
2 Press [OK]. The Custom PaperSize menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Measurement.
4 Press [OK]. The Measurement menu screen appears.
5 Press or to select the paper size units and then press [OK]. The
unit for entering the paper size is set and the Custom PaperSize
menu screen reappears.
6 Press or to select Size Entry(Y).
7 Press [OK]. The Size Entry(Y) menu screen appears.
8 Use the numeric keys or press or to enter the paper length.
The range of paper lengths you can set for each cassette is as
follows:
• Cassette:
148 to 356 mm (5.83 to 14.02 inches)
• Paper Feeder PF-320:
162 to 356 mm (6.38 to 14.02 inches)
9 Press [OK]. The entered paper length is set and the Custom
PaperSize menu screen reappears.
10
Press or to select Size Entry(X).
11
Press [OK]. The Size Entry(X) menu screen appears.
12
Use the numeric keys or or to enter the paper width.
The range of paper widths you can set for each cassette is as follows:
• Cassette:
105 to 216 mm (4.13 to 8.5 inches)
• Paper Feeder PF-320:
92 to 216 mm (3.62 to 8.5 inches)
13
Press [OK]. The entered paper width is set and the Custom
PaperSize menu screen reappears.
14
Pressing [Exit] ([Right Select]) returns to the Ready to print
screen.
Custom PaperSize:
Size Entry(X)
Exit
03
Size Entry(Y)
02
01
Measurement
Measurement:
inch
01
mm
02
*
Size Entry(Y):
200
(148 - 356)
mm
Size Entry(X):
216
(105 - 216)
mm
4-37
Operation Panel
Media Type (Setting the cassette paper type)
To set the paper type for the paper cassette, refer to Media Type (Setting the cassette paper type) on page 4-33.
Bulk Feeder Set. (Settings for the optional bulk paper feeder)
To print correctly on paper supplied from the optional bulk paper feeder, use the procedure below to set the paper size and
media type.
The options available in Bulk Feeder Set. menu are as follows:
• Paper Size (Paper size setting for the optional bulk paper feeder)...4-37
• Media Type (Paper type setting for the optional bulk paper feeder)...4-38
Paper Size (Paper size setting for the optional bulk paper feeder)
You can use this to set the paper size that can be supplied from the optional bulk paper feeder.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select Bulk
Feeder Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Bulk Feeder Set. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Paper Size.
4 Press [OK]. The Paper Size screen appears listing the paper sizes
that can be supplied from the bulk paper feeder.
The available paper sizes are as follows:
Envelope Monarch
Envelope #10
Envelope DL
Envelope C5
Executive
Letter
A4
B5
A5-R
A6
B6
Envelope #9
Envelope #6
ISO B5
Custom
Hagaki
Oufuku Hagaki
16K
Statement
Youkei 2
Youkei 4
Note Bulk Feeder Set. is displayed only when the optional bulk paper feeder is installed on the printer.
Operation Panel
4-38
5 Press or to select the desired paper size.
6 Press [OK]. The paper size for the bulk paper feeder is set and the
Bulk Feeder Set. menu screen reappears.
Media Type (Paper type setting for the optional bulk paper feeder)
You can use this to set the paper type that can be supplied from the optional bulk paper feeder.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select Bulk
Feeder Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Bulk Feeder Set. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Media Type.
4 Press [OK]. The Media Type screen appears listing the media types
that can be supplied from the bulk paper feeder.
The available media types are as follows:
Plain
Transparency
Preprinted
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Vellum
Rough
Letterhead
Color
Prepunched
Envelope
Cardstock
Thick
High Quality
CUSTOM 1 to 8
5 Press or to select the desired media type.
6 Press [OK]. The media type for the bulk paper feeder is set and the
Bulk Feeder Set. menu screen reappears.
Bulk Feeder Set.:
Exit
Media Type
02
01
Paper Size
Media Type:
Plain
01
Transparency
02
*
Preprinted
03
4-39
Operation Panel
Media Type Set. (Paper type settings)
You can set the paper thickness by selecting a paper weight. This allows you to set the paper thickness for each of the media
types that can be used on the printer. And for custom paper registered in the printer (up to 8), you can specify paper
thickness and whether duplex printing is permitted. (For the procedure for registering custom paper sizes, refer to Custom
PaperSize (Setting a Custom Paper Size) on page 4-35.)
For normal settings, refer to Setting the Paper Thickness on page 4-39. For custom paper settings, refer to Custom Paper
Settings on page 4-40.
The options available in Media Type Set. menu are as follows:
• Setting the Paper Thickness...4-39
• Custom Paper Settings...4-40
Setting the Paper Thickness
You can set the paper thickness by selecting a paper weight.
The available paper weights are as follows:
• Extra Heavy
• Heavy 3
• Heavy 2
• Heavy 1
•Normal 3
•Normal 2
•Normal 1
• Light
Each media type's default weight is indicated.
Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.
(For the procedure for setting weights for custom paper (CUSTOM 1 to 8), refer to Custom Paper Settings on page 4-40.)
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select Media Type
Set..
Media Type Paper Weight Media Type Paper Weight
Plain Normal 2 Letterhead Normal 2
Transparency Extra Heavy Color Normal 2
Preprinted Normal 2 Prepunched Normal 2
Labels Heavy 1 Envelope
†
†
The processing speed will be slower than normal.
Heavy 3
Bond Normal 3 Cardstock Heavy 3
Recycled Normal 2 Thick Heavy 3
Vellum Light HighQuality Normal 2
Rough Normal 2 CUSTOM 1 to 8 Normal 2
Note Depending on the type of paper, the toner may not adhere to the paper properly. To solve this problem, select
the half speed mode from the printer driver. For more information, refer to Half Speed Mode (Printer Driver
Settings) on page 3-8.
Operation Panel
4-40
2 Press [OK]. The Media Type Set. screen appears listing the
media types that can used with the printer.
3 Press or to select the media type for which you want to set the
paper weight.
4 Press [OK]. A menu for the selected media is displayed.
5 Press or to select Paper Weight.
6 Press [OK]. The Paper Weight screen appears listing the paper
weights that can used with the printer.
7 Press or to select the desired paper weight.
8 Press [OK]. The paper weight is set and the Media Type Set.
screen reappears.
Custom Paper Settings
This setting specifies the paper weight of the selected custom paper, whether duplex printing is permitted and the
registration of the name to be displayed.
Use the procedure below to set the custom paper weight.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select Media Type
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Media Type Set. screen appears listing the
media types that can used with the printer.
3 Press or to select the custom paper (CUSTOM 1 to 8) for which
you want to set the paper weight.
4 Press [OK]. A menu for the selected media is displayed.
5 Press or to select Paper Weight.
Media Type Set.:
Preprinted
Exit
03
Transparency
02
01
Plain
Plain:
Exit
01
Paper Weight
Paper Weight:
Exit
06
04
Heavy 1
05
Normal 3
Normal 2*
Media Type Set.:
Preprinted
Exit
03
Transparency
02
01
Plain
CUSTOM 1:
Name Entry
Exit
03
Duplex
02
01
Paper Weight
4-41
Operation Panel
6 Press [OK]. The Paper Weight screen appears listing the paper
weights that can used with the printer.
7 Press or to select the desired paper weight.
8 Press [OK]. The paper weight is set and the custom paper screen
reappears.
Use the procedure below to specify whether duplex printing is permitted with custom paper.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select Media Type
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Media Type Set. screen appears listing the
media types that can used with the printer.
3 Press or to select the custom paper (CUSTOM 1 to 8) for which
you want to set the duplex printing permission.
4 Press [OK]. A menu for the selected media is displayed.
5 Press or to select Duplex.
6 Press [OK]. The Duplex screen appears listing the paper weights
that can used with the printer.
7 Press or to specify whether duplex printing is permitted.
8 Press [OK]. The duplex printing permission is set and the custom
paper screen reappears.
Use the procedure below to register the name to be displayed for the custom paper.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select Media Type
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Media Type Set. screen appears listing the
media types that can used with the printer.
3 Press or to select the custom paper (CUSTOM 1 to 8) for which
you want to register a name to display.
Operation Panel
4-42
4 Press [OK]. A menu for the selected media is displayed.
5 Press or to select Name Entry.
6 Press [OK]. The Name Entry screen appears.
7 Use the numeric keys to enter the name to display for the custom
paper.
8 Press [OK]. Register the name to display and the renamed custom
paper screen reappears.
Reset Type Adj. (Resets customized settings)
This resets all the settings specified in Media Type Set. (Paper type settings) on page 4-39.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select Reset Type
Adj..
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Completed. appears
and the Paper Settings menu reappears.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Paper Settings
menu without resetting the customized settings.
CUSTOM 1:
Name Entry
Exit
03
Duplex
02
01
Paper Weight
Name Entry:
Text
ABC
Note Up to 16 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Reset Type Adjust.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
4-43
Operation Panel
Paper Setup Msg(Check setting when loading paper)
Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new paper is set for each cassette.
1 In the Paper Settings menu, press or to select Paper
Setup Msg.
2 Press [OK]. The Paper Setup Msg menu screen appears.
3 In the Paper Setup Msg menu, press or to select the MP Tray
or cassette you want to set.
4 Press [OK]. The MP Tray screen or Cassette # screen appears.
5 Press or to select On or Off.
Press [OK]. The Paper Setup Msg setting is set and the Paper
Setup Msg menu screen reappears.
Operation Panel
4-44
Print Settings
These settings specify the following printing parameters: paper feed source, paper feed mode, duplex printing, override A4/
LTR, emulation mode, print quality, and setting pagination.
The options available in Print Settings are as follows:
• Paper Source (Selecting the paper feed source)...4-44
• Auto Cass. Change (Auto Cassette Change setting)...4-45
• MP Tray Priority (the settings for priority paper feed from the MP tray)...4-45
• Paper Feed Mode (Setting the paper feed source)...4-46
• Duplex (Setting the duplex printing)...4-46
• Paper Output (Selecting the output stack)...4-47
• Override A4/LTR (Overriding difference between A4 and Letter)...4-48
• Emulation (Setting the emulation)...4-48
• Font (Selecting the default font)...4-50
• Code Set (Setting the code set)...4-52
• Print Quality (Setting print quality)...4-53
• Page Setting (Setting pagination)...4-55
• User Name (The User Name display settings)...4-59
• Job Name (The Job Name display settings)...4-59
• Job Terminator (Job Terminator settings)...4-60
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Print Settings.
3 Press [OK]. The Print Settings menu appears showing a list of
available options.
Paper Source (Selecting the paper feed source)
You can select the paper source from which the printer feeds paper as the default. If an optional paper feeder(s) is installed,
it can also be set the default paper source.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Paper
Source.
2 Press [OK]. The Paper Source screen appears showing a list of the
available paper sources.
The available paper sources are as follows:
MP Tray
Cassette 1 (printer's standard paper cassette)
Cassette 2 to 5 (optional paper feeders (only installed paper
feeders are shown))
3 Press or to select the desired paper source.
4 Press [OK]. The paper source is set and the Print Settings
menu reappears.
Print Settings:
MP Tray Priority
Exit
03
Auto Cass.Change
02
01
Paper Source
Paper Source:
MP Tray
01
Cassette 1
02
*
4-45
Operation Panel
Auto Cass. Change (Auto Cassette Change setting)
You can select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Auto
Cass.Change.
2 Press [OK]. The Auto Cass.Change screen appears showing the
auto cassette change settings.
3 Press or to select Off or On.
4 Press [OK]. The auto cassette change is set and the Print
Settings menu reappears.
MP Tray Priority (the settings for priority paper feed from the MP tray)
If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray in the paper feed.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select MP Tray
Priority.
2 Press [OK]. The MP Tray Priority screen appears showing the
available MP tray priority mode options.
Off (The printer driver settings are followed.)
Auto Feed (If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper
in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray.)
Always (If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be
from the MP tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.)
3 Press or to select the desired MP tray priority mode.
4 Press [OK]. The MP tray priority mode is set and the Print
Settings menu reappears.
Off The printer displays Load paper cassette #. (# is a cassette number) or Load paper in MP
Tray, and stops printing.
Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.
To print from the other cassette, press [Alt.] ([Left Select]). Press or to select the desired
paper source, and then press [OK].
On The printer continues printing automatically when the other cassette contains the same paper as the
currently used paper cassette.
Note You can also configure the Auto Cassette Change in
the Embedded Web Server RX. Access to the Embedded
Web Server RX, and then go to Function Settings > Printer
page. For more information on access to the Embedded Web
Server RX, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User
Guide.
Operation Panel
4-46
Paper Feed Mode (Setting the paper feed source)
This mode specifies how the paper should be fed once the paper feed source and paper type have been chosen. If Auto
is selected, the printer searches for a paper feed source that matches the paper size and type, and paper is then delivered
from that source. If Fixed is selected and there is no matching paper feed source, handling proceeds as specified by Paper
Mismatch for Error Handling. For details on paper feeding when Fixed is selected, refer to Paper Mismatch (Detection
settings for paper size/type errors when the paper source is fixed) on page 4-104. To change the settings, follow the steps
described below.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Paper Feed
Mode.
2 Press [OK]. The Paper Feed Mode screen appears showing the
available paper feed options.
3 Press or to select the desired paper feed mode.
4 Press [OK]. The paper feed mode is set and the Print Settings
menu reappears.
Duplex (Setting the duplex printing)
Using the duplexer, you can automatically print on both sides of the paper.
Duplex printing is available for the following paper (media) types:
Plain
Preprinted
Bond
Recycled
Rough
Letterhead
Color
Prepunched
High Quality
Custom 1 to 8
Paper Feed Mode:
Auto
01
Fixed
02
*
Note Duplex printing can be also performed from the MP tray. If the paper to be fed from the MP tray does not
match the paper size and paper type of the current paper feed source cassette, a paper jam may occur.
When Custom is specified, duplex printing can be set. For details, refer to Custom Paper Settings on page 4-40.
4-47
Operation Panel
Binding Modes
Binding refers to the manner in which printed pages of paper are joined together (by gluing, stitching, etc.) in book form.
The two possible types of binding are: Bind Long Edge, in which pages are joined together along their long edge; and Bind
Short Edge, in which they are joined together along their short edge. In selecting a binding type, you must also consider the
orientation of the printed page. You can use Bind Long Edge or Bind Short Edge with either landscape or portrait printing.
Depending on the binding type and print orientation, the duplexer provides four types of binding. These are: (1) portrait, Bind
Long Edge, (2) portrait, Bind Short Edge, (3) landscape, Bind Long Edge, and (4) landscape, Bind Short Edge. The figure
below shows these binding methods.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Duplex.
2 Press [OK]. The Duplex screen appears showing the list of available
duplex printing modes.
3 Press or to select the desired duplex printing mode.
The message display toggles through the following:
Off
Bind Long Edge
Bind Short Edge
Selecting Off disables duplex printing.
4 Press [OK]. The duplex printing mode is set and the Print
Settings menu reappears.
Paper Output (Selecting the output stack)
The Paper Output menu on the operation panel allows you to select either the face-down tray or the faceup tray option for
the output stack.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Paper
Output.
2 Press [OK]. The Paper Output screen appears.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
Portrait,
Bind Long Edge
Landscape,
Bind Long Edge
Portrait,
Bind Short Edge
Landscape,
Bind Short Edge
Note This menu can be used for P-5031DN, P-5531DN and P-6031DN.
Operation Panel
4-48
3 Press or to select output stack - TopTray FaceDown or Rear
Tray FaceUp.
4 Press [OK]. The output stack is set and the Print Settings menu
reappears.
Override A4/LTR (Overriding difference between A4 and Letter)
When the Override A4/LTR is turned On using the operation panel, the printer ignores the difference between A4 and
Letter paper sizes. Printing is performed without an error message even if the actual paper size in the current cassette differs
from the paper size formatting the job.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Override
A4/LTR.
2 Press [OK]. The Override A4/LTR screen appears.
3 Press or to select Off or On.
4 Press [OK]. The Print Settings menu reappears.
Emulation (Setting the emulation)
You can change the emulation mode. Use the procedure below to select the mode.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Emulation
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Emulation Set. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Emulation.
4 Press [OK]. The Emulation screen appears showing a list of the
available emulations. The defaults differ depending on the delivery
destination.
The available emulations are as follows:
PCL6
IBM Proprinter
EPSON LQ-850
Line Printer
KPDL
KPDL(Auto)
5 Press or to select the desired emulation.
6 Press [OK]. The emulation is set and the Emulation Set. menu
reappears.
Override A4/LTR:
Off
01
On
02
*
Note To print the PDF file using FTP printing, set emulation to KPDL.
Emulation Set.:
Exit
01
Emulation
Emulation:
PCL6
01
IBM Proprinter
02
*
EPSON LQ-850
03
4-49
Operation Panel
KPDL Error Rpt. (Printing KPDL errors)
The printer can print error descriptions when printing error occurs during KPDL emulation.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Emulation
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Emulation Set. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select KPDL Error Rpt..
4 Press [OK]. The KPDL Error Rpt. screen appears.
5 Press or to select whether error reports are printed.
6 Press [OK]. The error report print setting is set and the Emulation
Set. menu reappears.
Alt. Emulation (Alternative Emulation for KPDL Emulation)
The KPDL (AUTO) emulation enables the printer to automatically change the emulation mode according to the data
received when printing.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Emulation
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Emulation Set. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Alt. Emulation.
4 Press [OK]. The Alt. Emulation screen appears showing a list of
the available alternative emulations.
The available alternative emulations are as follows:
PCL6
IBM Proprinter
EPSON LQ-850
Line Printer
5 Press or to select the desired alternative emulation.
6 Press [OK]. The alternative emulation is set and the Emulation
Set. menu reappears.
IMPORTANT This setting only appears when KPDL or KPDL(Auto) is selected for the emulation.
IMPORTANT This setting only appears when KPDL(Auto) is selected for the emulation.
Operation Panel
4-50
Font (Selecting the default font)
You can select the default font. The default font can be one of the internal fonts or a font that is downloaded to the printer
memory or stored on SD card, or SSD.
In this menu, you can also set the type and pitch for Courier and Letter Gothic.
The options available in Font menu are as follows:
• Selecting Regular or Dark Courier/Letter Gothic...4-51
• Changing the Default Font Size...4-51
• Character Pitch...4-52
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Font.
2 Press [OK]. The Font menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Font Type.
4 Press [OK]. The Font Type screen appears.
5 To select a font built-in the printer, press or to select Internal.
6 Press [OK]. Select the font type and the Font menu reappears.
7 Press or to select Font ID.
8 Press [OK]. The Font ID entry screen appears.
9 Press or to select the number of the desired font.
To select optional fonts other than those built-in, select Option in
step 5. You can perform this operation only when optional fonts are
installed in the printer.
Font:
Courier
Exit
03
Font ID
02
01
Font Type
Font Type:
Internal
01
Option
02
*
Font:
Courier
Exit
03
Font ID
02
01
Font Type
Font ID:
I000
Note It is possible to check the numbers of the built-in fonts
by outputting a Font List. For details, refer to Font List
(Printing a list of the printer's fonts) on page 4-14.
4-51
Operation Panel
The letter before the number indicates the location of the font, as
shown below.
I: Internal font
S: Soft (downloaded) font
M: Fonts in optional SD card
H: Fonts in RAM disk or optional SSD
10
Press [OK]. The default font is set and the Font menu reappears.
Selecting Regular or Dark Courier/Letter Gothic
Courier or Letter Gothic font thickness can be selected as Regular or Dark. In the procedure below, it is assumed that
Courier is selected. The procedure is the same for Letter Gothic.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Font.
2 Press [OK]. The Font menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Courier. If you are selecting the thickness
of the Letter Gothic font, choose Letter Gothic here instead.
4 Press [OK]. The Courier screen appears.
5 Press or to select Regular or Dark.
6 Press [OK]. The font thickness is set and the Font menu reappears.
Changing the Default Font Size
You can change the size of the default font. If you selected a proportional font, the character size can be changed.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Font.
2 Press [OK]. The Font menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Size.
4 Press [OK]. The Size entry screen appears.
5 Press or to enter the font size.
Note The font size can be set between 4.00 and 999.75
points, in 0.25-point increments.
Operation Panel
4-52
6 Press [OK]. The font size is set and the Font menu reappears.
Character Pitch
You can set the character pitch for fixed fonts.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Font.
2 Press [OK]. The Font menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Pitch.
4 Press [OK]. The Pitch entry screen appears.
5 Use the numeric keys or press or to enter the character pitch.
6 Press [OK]. The character pitch is set and the Font menu reappears.
Code Set (Setting the code set)
You can change the character code set. Available character code sets vary depending on the current font.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Code Set.
2 Press [OK]. The Code Set screen appears listing the available
character code sets.
3 Press or to select the desired character code set.
4 Press [OK]. The character code set is set and the Print Settings
menu reappears.
Font:
Courier
Exit
03
Font ID
02
01
Font Type
Pitch:
10.00
(0.44  99.99)
cpi
Note The character pitch can be set between 0.44 and
99.99 characters per inch, in 0.01 character-per-inch
increments.
Code Set:
IBM PC-8
IBM PC-8(D/N)
*
IBM PC-850
4-53
Operation Panel
Print Quality (Setting print quality)
In Print Quality menus, you can set the KIR mode, EcoPrint mode, and other settings.
The options available in Print Quality are as follows:
• KIR (Selecting the KIR mode)...4-53
• EcoPrint (Selecting the EcoPrint mode)...4-53
• Print Resolution (Selecting the Print Resolution)...4-54
• Print Density (Selecting the Print Density)...4-54
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Print
Quality.
2 Press [OK]. The Print Quality menu screen appears.
KIR (Selecting the KIR mode)
This printer incorporates the KIR smoothing function. KIR uses the software to enhance resolution, resulting in high quality
printing at resolution of 600 dpi and 300 dpi. KIR has no effect on the printing speed.
1 In the Print Quality menu, press or to select KIR.
2 Press [OK]. The KIR screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether the KIR mode is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The KIR mode is set and the Print Quality menu
screen reappears.
EcoPrint (Selecting the EcoPrint mode)
By enabling EcoPrint mode, you can minimize the amount of toner used during printing. Because images printed in this
mode may be slightly coarser than those printed in standard resolution, you should use EcoPrint for test prints or other
situations where high-quality prints are not required. EcoPrint has no effect on the printing speed.
Use the procedure below to select EcoPrint mode.
1 In the Print Quality menu, press or to select EcoPrint.
2 Press [OK]. The EcoPrint screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether the EcoPrint mode is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The EcoPrint mode is set and the Print Quality
menu screen reappears.
Operation Panel
4-54
Print Resolution (Selecting the Print Resolution)
You can set the default print resolution in four ways: 300dpi, 600dpi, Fast1200 and Fine1200. The clarity of printed
characters and graphics becomes sharper in this order.
1 In the Print Quality menu, press or to select Print
Resolution.
2 Press [OK]. The Print Resolution screen appears.
3 Press or to select the Print Resolution.
4 Press [OK]. The Print Resolution is set and the Print Quality
menu screen reappears.
Print Density (Selecting the Print Density)
The print density can be adjusted in five steps: from 1 Lighter to 5 Darker.
1 In the Print Quality menu, press or to select Print
Density.
2 Press [OK]. The Print Density screen appears.
3 Press or to select the print density from five steps from 1
Lighter to 5 Darker
4 Press [OK]. The print density is set and the Print Quality menu
screen reappears.
Print Resolution:
Fine1200
01
Fast1200
02
*
600dpi
03
Print Density:
1 Lighter
01
2
02
*3
03
4-55
Operation Panel
Page Setting (Setting pagination)
You can use the Page Setting menu to set the number of copies, the page orientation and other pagination settings.
The options available in Page Setting are as follows:
• Copies (Number of copies)...4-55
• Reduced Print (Reduced print settings)...4-55
• Orientation (Print orientation)...4-57
• LF Action (Linefeed)...4-57
• CR Action (Carriage-Return)...4-58
• Wide A4 (Wide A4 pitch)...4-58
• XPS FitTo Page (Adjusting the XPS file print out size)...4-58
• TIFF/JPEG Size (Adjusting the TIFF/JPEG file print out size)...4-58
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Page
Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The Page Setting menu screen appears.
Copies (Number of copies)
You can set the number of copies of each page to be printed.
1 In the Page Setting menu, press or to select Copies.
2 Press [OK]. The Copies screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the number of copies.
4 Press [OK]. The setting is stored and the Page Setting menu
reappears.
Reduced Print (Reduced print settings)
This selects the settings for reducing the size of the print data and printing it (Reduced Print). Set the paper size before the
reduction and set the reduction ratio.
1 In the Page Setting menu, press or to select Reduced
Print.
Note With Reduced Print, the results may differ from the results of same size printing. The character line width
may not be constant and lines may appear in the middle of figures, images or patterns. Also, thin lines, etc., may
not be printed. Furthermore, it may not be possible to read barcodes that have been printed with Reduced Print.
Operation Panel
4-56
2 Press [OK]. The Reduced Print screen appears.
Reduced Print is displayed as follows.
Source Size: This is the paper size before the reduction. This must
be the same as the paper size set in the print data.
Target Size / Reduction Ratio: This is the paper size after reduction
or the reduction ratio. It is displayed with either the paper size or the
reduction ratio.
Refer to the table below for the possible settings for the combination
of Source Size and Target Size / Reduction Ratio.
3 Press or to change to the Source Size required.
4 Press to select Target Size / Reduction Ratio and move the
position being entered.
5 Press or to change to the Target Size required. Only the Target
Size / Reduction Ratio changes.
Reduced Print:
Cassette
100%
Source Size Target Size /
Reduction Ratio
Source Size Target Size / Reduction Ratio
Cassette 100%
98%
Legal 100%
98%
Letter 100%
A4
98%
Oficio II 100%
Folio 100%
16K 100%
A5 100%
98%
B5 100%
A5
98%
A4 100%
Letter
B5
A5
98%
B4 B5
A4
A3 A4
SF A4
Reduced Print:
Cassette
100%
4-57
Operation Panel
6 Press [OK]. The Reduced Print is set and the Page Setting menu
reappears.
Orientation (Print orientation)
You can select portrait (upright) or landscape (sideways) page orientation.
1 In the Page Setting menu, press or to select Orientation.
2 Press [OK]. The Orientation screen appears.
3 Press or to select the desired Orientation.
4 Press [OK]. The orientation is set and the Page Setting menu
reappears.
LF Action (Linefeed)
This procedure instructs the printer what to do when it receives a linefeed code (0AH).
• LF Only: Linefeed is performed.
• LF and CR: A linefeed and carriage return are performed.
• Ignore LF: The linefeed is ignored.
1 In the Page Setting menu, press or to select LF Action.
2 Press [OK]. The LF Action screen appears.
3 Press or to select the desired action.
4 Press [OK]. The action is set and the Page Setting menu
reappears.
Portrait Orientation
A
Landscape Orientation
A
Operation Panel
4-58
CR Action (Carriage-Return)
This procedure instructs the printer what to do when it receives a carriage return code (0DH).
• CR Only: A carriage-return is performed.
• LF and CR: A linefeed and carriage return are performed.
• Ignore CR: The carriage-return is ignored.
1 In the Page Setting menu, press or to select CR Action.
2 Press [OK]. The CR Action screen appears.
3 Press or to select the desired action.
4 Press [OK]. The action is set and the Page Setting menu
reappears.
Wide A4 (Wide A4 pitch)
Turn this to On to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page (78 characters
at 10 pitches) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitches). This setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation.
1 In the Page Setting menu, press or to select Wide A4.
2 Press [OK]. The Wide A4 screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether Wide A4 mode is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The wide mode setting is set and the Page Setting
menu reappears.
XPS FitTo Page (Adjusting the XPS file print out size)
Select On in this setting to enlarge or reduce XPS files to fit the printable area during printing.
1 In the Page Setting menu, press or to select XPS FitTo
Page.
2 Press [OK]. The XPS FitTo Page screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether XPS FitTo Page mode is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The XPS FitTo Page setting is set and the Page
Setting menu reappears.
TIFF/JPEG Size (Adjusting the TIFF/JPEG file print out size)
Use this setting to select the printing method used when TIFF or JPEG files are printed directly.
1 In the Page Setting menu, press or to select TIFF/JPEG
Size.
CR Action:
CR Only
01
LF and CR
02
*
Ignore CR
03
Wide A4:
Off
01
On
02
*
XPS FitTo Page:
Off
01
On
02
*
4-59
Operation Panel
2 Press [OK]. The TIFF/JPEG Size screen appears.
The options available in TIFF/JPEG Size are as follows:
• Paper Size
Images are resized so that they fill the paper size when printed.
• Image Resolution
Image files are printed at the resolution specified in the resolution
information. Images with no resolution information are printed
using the Paper Size setting.
• Print Resolution
Images are printed using a 1-to-1 correspondence between the
image file pixels and printed dots. For example, the printed size of
a 600 × 300-pixel image file is 1 inch × 1/2 inch.
3 Press or to select whether TIFF/JPEG Size mode is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The TIFF/JPEG Size setting is set and the Page
Setting menu reappears.
User Name (The User Name display settings)
Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select User Name.
2 Press [OK]. The User Name screen appears.
3 Press or to select On or Off.
4 Press [OK]. The User Name setting is set and the Print Settings
menu reappears.
Job Name (The Job Name display settings)
Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Job Name.
2 Press [OK]. The Job Name screen appears.
The options available in Job Name are as follows:
Off
Job Name (Use the job name set in the printer driver.)
Job No. + Job Name
Job Name + Job No.
3 Press or to select the desired job name.
4 Press [OK]. The Job Name setting is set and the Print Settings
menu reappears.
Note Images are automatically rotated during printing to
provide a closer match between the aspect ratios of the
image file and the paper used for printing.
Operation Panel
4-60
Job Terminator (Job Terminator settings)
You can select the condition which regarded as a job termination if the print job could not be processed until the end due to
your environment and the other reason. When selecting EOJ, the termination of the job data (R RES;!! EXIT;) is regarded
as one job until it is detected. When selecting End of Session, the data included in a network session at network
connection is regarded as one job. When selecting UEL, the UEL included in the termination of the job data is regarded as
one job until it is detected.
1 In the Print Settings menu, press or to select Job
Terminator.
2 Press [OK]. The Job Terminator screen appears.
3 Press or to select EOJ , End of Session or UEL.
4 Press [OK]. The Job Terminator setting is set and the Print
Settings menu screen reappears.
Network (Network settings)
Configure network settings.
The options available in the Network settings are as follows:
• Host Name (Check the host name of the machine)...4-61
• Wi-Fi Direct Set (Wi-Fi Direct settings)...4-61
• Wi-Fi Settings (Wi-Fi Settings)...4-63
• Wired Netwk. Set (Wired Network Settings)...4-70
• ProtocolSettings (Detailed settings for the network protocol)...4-78
• Primary Network (Select the network interface to use)...4-80
• Ping (Checking the connection of a connected device)...4-80
• Restart Network (Restarting the network card)...4-81
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Network.
3 Press [OK]. The Network menu screen appears.
Job Terminator:
EOJ
01
End of Session
02
*
UEL
03
Note Check with your network administrator when selecting the network setting. After all network related settings
have been done, restart the network. Refer to Restart Network (Restarting the network card) on page 4-81. This is
mandatory to make the settings effective!
When Embedded Web Server RX is used, network parameters and security settings can be conveniently changed
and checked from your PC. For more information, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Network:
Host Name
Exit
Wi-Fi Direct Set
01
02
Wi-Fi Settings
03
4-61
Operation Panel
Host Name (Check the host name of the machine)
Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Embedded Web Server RX.
1 In the Network menu, press or to select Host Name.
2 Press [OK]. The Host Name screen appears.
Wi-Fi Direct Set (Wi-Fi Direct settings)
Set Wi-Fi Direct.
The options available in the Wi-Fi Direct settings are as follows:
• Wi-Fi Direct (Enable/Disable Wi-Fi Direct)...4-61
• Device Name (Specify the device name.)...4-62
• IP address (Check the IP address of the machine)...4-62
• Auto Disconnect (Auto Disconnect Settings)...4-62
• Disconnect Timer (Setting the Disconnect Time)...4-63
1 In the Network menu, press or to select Wi-Fi Direct Set.
2 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct Set menu screen appears.
Wi-Fi Direct (Enable/Disable Wi-Fi Direct)
This specified whether Wi-Fi Direct is used.
1 In the Wi-Fi Direct Set menu, press or to select Wi-Fi
Direct.
2 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct screen appears.
3 Press or to select On or Off.
4 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct setting is set and the Wi-Fi
Direct Set menu reappears.
Note Wi-Fi Direct Set is only displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed.
Operation Panel
4-62
Device Name (Specify the device name.)
Specify the device name.
1 In the Wi-Fi Direct Set menu, press or to select Device
Name.
2 Press [OK]. The Device Name screen appears.
3 Enter the device name using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. The device name is stored and the Wi-Fi Direct Set
menu reappears.
IP address (Check the IP address of the machine)
Check the IP address of the machine.
1 In the Wi-Fi Direct Set menu, press or to select IP
address.
2 Press [OK]. The IP address screen appears.
Auto Disconnect (Auto Disconnect Settings)
Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.
1 In the Wi-Fi Direct Set menu, press or to select Auto
Disconnect.
2 Press [OK]. The Auto Disconnect screen appears.
3 Press or to select On or Off.
4 Press [OK]. TheAuto Disconnect setting is set and the Wi-Fi
Direct Set menu reappears.
Note This setting is displayed when the setting for Wi-Fi Direct (Enable/Disable Wi-Fi Direct) on page 4-61 is set to
On.
Device Name:
Text
ABC
AAAA
Note Up to 32 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Note This setting is displayed when the setting for Wi-Fi Direct (Enable/Disable Wi-Fi Direct) on page 4-61 is set to
On.
IP Address:
192. 168. 0. 10
Note This setting is displayed when the setting for Wi-Fi Direct (Enable/Disable Wi-Fi Direct) on page 4-61 is set to
On.
Auto Disconnect:
Off
01
On
02
*
4-63
Operation Panel
Disconnect Timer (Setting the Disconnect Time)
You can set the time after which devices connected by Wi-Fi Direct are automatically disconnected.
1 In the Wi-Fi Direct Set menu, press or to select
Disconnect Timer.
2 Press [OK]. The Disconnect Timer screen appears.
3 Press or to set the day, hour, and minute.
Use and to move the cursor right and left.
4 Press [OK]. The disconnect time is set and the Wi-Fi Direct Set
menu reappears.
Wi-Fi Settings (Wi-Fi Settings)
Set Wi-Fi.
The options available in the Wi-Fi settings are as follows:
• Wi-Fi (Enable/Disable Wi-Fi)...4-63
• Setup (Wireless network settings)...4-64
• TCP/IP Settings (TCP/IP Settings for the optional Network Interface Kit)...4-89
• Restart Network (Restarting the optional Network Interface Kit)...4-70
1 In the Network menu, press or to select Wi-Fi Settings.
2 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Settings menu screen appears.
Wi-Fi (Enable/Disable Wi-Fi)
This specified whether Wi-Fi is used.
1 In the Wi-Fi Settings menu, press or to select Wi-Fi.
2 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi screen appears.
3 Press or to select On or Off.
4 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi setting is set and the Wi-Fi Settings
menu reappears.
Note This setting is displayed when the setting for Auto Disconnect (Auto Disconnect Settings) on page 4-62 is set
to On.
Note Wi-Fi Settings is only displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed.
Operation Panel
4-64
Setup (Wireless network settings)
This selects the settings for Wireless network.
1 In the Wi-Fi Settings menu, press or to select Setup.
2 Press [OK]. The Setup menu screen appears.
The options available in the Setup are as follows:
• ConnectionStatus (Wireless network connection status
check)...4-64
• Quick Setup (Quick setup for the wireless network)...4-64
• Custom Setup (Detailed settings for the wireless network)...4-66
ConnectionStatus (Wireless network connection status check)
When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed, you can check the status of the wireless network.
1 In the Setup menu, press or to select ConnectionStatus.
2 Press [OK]. The ConnectionStatus screen appears.
3 Press or . The NetwkName(SSID) is displayed.
If the entire name shown as the NetwkName(SSID)will not fit on one
line, pressing [Detail] ([Right Select]) changes to a 3-line name
display.
Quick Setup (Quick setup for the wireless network)
When connecting to an access point which supports the automatic wireless network setup, you can select the connection
settings using Quick Setup.
1 In the Setup menu, press or to select Quick Setup.
2 Press [OK]. The Quick Setup menu screen appears.
The following operations are possible:
•
AvailableNetwork (Display the access points)...4-65
•
Push Button (Connect using Push Button)...4-65
•
PIN (Device) (Connect using a PIN code (for the Wireless Network
Interface Kit))
...4-66
Note This setting is displayed when the setting for Wi-Fi (Enable/Disable Wi-Fi) on page 4-63 is set to On.
Setup:
ConnectionStatus
Exit
Quick Setup
01
02
Custom Setup
03
ConnectionStatus:
Status
Connected
1/ 2
ConnectionStatus:
Detail
NetwkName(SSID) 2/ 2
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST…
Detail:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU
VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz1234567890
Quick Setup:
PIN (Device)
Exit
03
Push Button
02
01
AvailableNetwork
4-65
Operation Panel
AvailableNetwork (Display the access points)
Displays the access points which can be connected to.
1 In the Quick Setup menu, press or to AvailableNetwork.
2 Press [OK]. The AvailableNetwork screen appears.
3 Press or to select the access point to connect to.
4 Press [OK]. The connection with the access point is started.
When it is necessary to enter an encryption key, the WEP Key entry
screen or Preshared Key entry screen appears.
When a WEP Key must be entered:
Enter the WEP Key using the numeric keys and press [OK].
When a Preshared Key must be entered:
Enter the Preshared Key using the numeric keys and press [OK].
Push Button (Connect using Push Button)
When the access point supports the automatic wireless network setup button, you can configure the wireless settings
automatically using the button and the panel operation of the printer.
1 In the Quick Setup menu, press or to select Push Button.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press the automatic wireless network setup button on the access
point.
4 Press [Next] ([Right Select]). The message Connecting...
appears and the connection with the access point starts.
Note If you cannot find the desired access point, press
[Reload] ([Right Select]) to update the information.
Press [Menu] ([Left Select]) to display the next item.
• Detail (Detailed information of the selected access point
appears.)
• WEP Key Index (Set the WEP key index.)
Up to 26 characters can be entered. For details on entering
characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2.
Note The number of characters is between 8 and 64. For
details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-66
PIN (Device) (Connect using a PIN code (for the Wireless Network Interface Kit))
The connection is started using the PIN code for the machine. The PIN code displayed should be entered at the access
point. The PIN code for the machine is generated automatically.
1 In the Quick Setup menu, press or to select PIN (Device).
2 Press [OK]. The message Start the PIN code setup. Are
you sure? appears.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). A PIN code is displayed on the
Message display.
4 Write down the PIN code displayed on the Message display.
5 Press [Next] ([Right Select]). The message Connecting...
appears.
6 At the access point, immediately enter the PIN code which wrote
down on step 4. The connection with the access point starts.
Custom Setup (Detailed settings for the wireless network)
It is possible to change the detailed settings of the wireless network.
1 In the Wireless Network menu, press or to select Custom
Setup.
2 Press [OK]. The Custom Setup menu screen appears.
The following operations are possible:
• Netwk Name (SSID) (Registration of the access point's SSID)...4-
66
• Netwk Authentic. (Network Authentication setting)...4-67
• Encryption (Encryption settings)...4-67
Netwk Name (SSID) (Registration of the access point's SSID)
This sets the SSID (Service Set Identifier) for the wireless network access point the machine will be connected to.
1 In the Custom Setup menu, press or to select Netwk
Name(SSID).
2 Press [OK]. The Netwk Name(SSID) entry screen appears.
3 Enter the access point's SSID using the numeric keys.
Start the PIN code
setup.
Are you sure?
Yes No
Enter the PIN code
into the access point
and press [Next].
Next
PIN:xxxxxxxx
PIN code
Custom Setup:
Encryption
03
Netwk Authentic.
02
01
Netwk Name(SSID)
Connect Exit
Netwk Name(SSID):
Text
ABC
Note Up to 32 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
4-67
Operation Panel
4 Press [OK]. The Custom Setup menu reappears.
Netwk Authentic. (Network Authentication setting)
This sets the authentication method to be used when connecting to an access point.
1 In the Custom Setup menu, press or to select Netwk
Authentic..
2 Press [OK]. The Netwk Authentic. screen appears.
The available authentication methods are as follows:
Open
WPA2/WPA-PSK
WPA2-PSK
WPA2/WPA-EAP
WPA2-EAP
3 Press or to select the desired authentication method.
4 Press [OK]. The Custom Setup menu reappears.
Encryption (Encryption settings)
This selects the encryption settings.
1 In the Custom Setup menu, press or to select Encryption.
2 Press [OK]. The Encryption screen appears.
The following operations are possible:
• Data Encryption (Data Encryption setting)...4-67
• WEP Key (WEP Key settings)...4-68
• WEP Key Index (WEP Key Index Settings)...4-68
• Preshared Key (Preshared Key settings)...4-68
Data Encryption (Data Encryption setting)
This sets the encryption method.
1 In the Encryption menu, press or to select Data
Encryption.
Note You can also configure the network authentication setting for WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise using
the web page of the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36). For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server
RX User Guide.
Note WEP Key and WEP Key Index is displayed when
Netwk Authentic. (Network Authentication setting) on page 4-
67 is set to Open.
Preshared Key is displayed when Netwk Authentic.
(Network Authentication setting) on page 4-67 is set to WPA2/
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK.
Operation Panel
4-68
2 Press [OK]. The Data Encryption screen appears.
3 Press or to select the desired encryption method.
4 Press [OK]. The Encryption menu reappears.
WEP Key (WEP Key settings)
This registers the WEP Key.
1 In the Encryption menu, press or to select WEP Key.
2 Press [OK]. The WEP Key screen appears.
3 Press[Edit] ([Right Select]). The WEP Key entry screen appears.
4 Enter the WEP Key using the numeric keys.
5 Press [OK]. The Encryption menu reappears.
WEP Key Index (WEP Key Index Settings)
Select the key index of the access point.
1 In the Encryption menu, press or to select WEP Key Index.
2 Press [OK]. The WEP Key Index screen appears.
3 Press or to select the desired WEP Key Index.
4 Press [OK]. The Encryption menu reappears.
Preshared Key (Preshared Key settings)
This registers the Preshared Key.
1 In the Encryption menu, press or to select Preshared Key.
Data Encryption:
Disable
01
WEP
02
*
Note The encryption methods that can be selected vary
depending on the authentication method set in Netwk
Authentic. (Network Authentication setting) on page 4-67.
Disable or WEP can be selected when Open is set.
AES or Auto can be selected when WPA2/WPA-PSK, or
WPA2-PSK is set.
AES can be selected when WPA2-PSK, or WPA2-EAP is set.
WEP Key:
Edit
-----
WEP Key:
Text
ABC
Note Up to 26 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
WEP Key Index:
0
01
1
02
*
2
03
4-69
Operation Panel
2 Press [OK]. The Preshared Key screen appears.
3 Press[Edit] ([Right Select]). The Preshared Key entry screen
appears.
4 Enter the Preshared Key using the numeric keys.
5 Press [OK] twice. The Encryption menu reappears.
TCP/IP Settings (TCP/IP Settings for the optional Network Interface Kit)
This selects the TCP/IP settings.
The options available in the TCP/IP Settings are as follows:
• TCP/IP (Enable/Disable TCP/IP)...4-89
• IPv4 Setting (TCP/IP IPv4 settings)...4-90
• IPv6 Setting (TCP/IP IPv6 settings)...4-90
1 In the Wi-Fi Settings menu, press or to select TCP/IP
Settings.
2 Press [OK]. The TCP/IP Settings menu screen appears.
TCP/IP (Enable/Disable TCP/IP)
This specified whether TCP/IP is used.
The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For details, refer to TCP/IP (Enable/Disable TCP/
IP) on page 4-71.
IPv4 Setting (TCP/IP IPv4 settings)
This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv4). The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For
details, refer to IPv4 Setting (TCP/IP IPv4 settings) on page 4-71.
IPv6 Setting (TCP/IP IPv6 settings)
This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv6). The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For
details, refer to IPv6 Setting (TCP/IP IPv6 settings) on page 4-74.
Note The number of characters is between 8 and 64. For
details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-70
Restart Network (Restarting the optional Network Interface Kit)
After all network related settings have been done, restart the network card of the device. This is mandatory to make the
settings effective.
1 In the Wi-Fi Settings menu, press or to select Restart
Network.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Restarting...
Please wait. appears and the network is restarted.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Basic menu without
restarting the network.
Wired Netwk. Set (Wired Network Settings)
Configure wired network settings.
The options available in the Wired Network are as follows:
• TCP/IP Settings (TCP/IP Settings)...4-70
• LAN Interface (LAN Interface setting)...4-77
1 In the Network menu, press or to select Wired Netwk. Set.
2 Press [OK]. The Wired Netwk. Set menu screen appears.
TCP/IP Settings (TCP/IP Settings)
This selects the TCP/IP settings.
The options available in the TCP/IP Settings are as follows:
• TCP/IP (Enable/Disable TCP/IP)...4-71
• IPv4 Setting (TCP/IP IPv4 settings)...4-71
• IPv6 Setting (TCP/IP IPv6 settings)...4-74
1 In the Wired Netwk. Set menu, press or to select TCP/IP
Settings.
2 Press [OK]. The TCP/IP Settings menu screen appears.
Wi-Fi Settings:
Restart Network
Exit
Setup
04
02
TCP/IP Settings
03
Restart.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Wired Netwk. Set:
TCP/IP Settings
Exit
LAN Interface
01
02
TCP/IP Settings:
IPv6 Setting
Exit
03
IPv4 Setting
02
01
TCP/IP
4-71
Operation Panel
TCP/IP (Enable/Disable TCP/IP)
The TCP/IP system refers to the Internet system, which has a 5-layer structure consisting of the interface layer, link layer,
network (IP) layer, transport (TCP/UDP) layer and application layer.
The interface layer is a key layer in the TCP/IP system that provides an abstracted interface that is not dependent on the
link (communication line: frame relay or Ethernet, etc.) to the IP module (IP layer). This means that the IP module can use
this abstracted interface (which is not dependent on the link type) to exchange IP packets back and forth with the link layer.
1 In the TCP/IP Settings menu, press or to select TCP/IP.
2 Press [OK]. The TCP/IP screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether TCP/IP is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The TCP/IP setting is set and the TCP/IP Settings
menu reappears.
IPv4 Setting (TCP/IP IPv4 settings)
This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv4).
1 In the TCP/IP Settings menu, press or to select IPv4
Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The IPv4 Setting menu screen appears.
The options available in the TCP/IP (IPv4) settings are as follows:
• DHCP (DHCP setting)...4-71
• Auto-IP (Auto-IP setting)...4-72
• IP Address (IP address setting)...4-72
• Subnet Mask (Subnet mask setting)...4-73
• Default Gateway (Gateway setting)...4-73
IMPORTANT The DHCP, Auto-IP, IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway and Bonjour menu options for IPv4 settings are displayed
when TCP/IP is enabled.
DHCP (DHCP setting)
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is the protocol that assigns the information required to establish a network
connection when a host attempts to connect to the network (Internet). This information includes the IP address of the local
node and the default router (the router in the host's own network system) and the DNS (Domain Name System) server.
DHCP is an extension of the BOOTP (Bootstrap) startup protocol.
1 In the IPv4 Setting menu, press or to select DHCP.
2 Press [OK]. The DHCP screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether DHCP is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The DHCP setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu
reappears.
Operation Panel
4-72
Auto-IP (Auto-IP setting)
This protocol is used for automatic assignment of an IP address when you connect to a small network that does not have
a DHCP server. Select an address from the range 169.254.0.1 to 169.254.255.254, and if no other device on the network
is using that address, it is used as your address.
1 In the IPv4 Setting menu, press or to select sAuto-IP.
2 Press [OK]. The Auto-IP screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether Auto-IP is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The Auto-IP setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu
reappears.
IP Address (IP address setting)
An IP address is the address of a network device such as a computer and is included in IP packets as needed for the
sending and receiving of Internet data (IP packets). (IP addresses can be either destination addresses or source
addresses.)
Specifically, an IP address is a bit string consisting of a host address (or host section) that identifies a computer (host)
connected to the Internet and a network address (or network section) that identifies the network to which that computer
belongs (or more specifically, the computer's network interface). Bit strings (IP addresses) that are unique throughout the
entire Internet system are allocated to each computer or interface.
The IP addresses currently used on the Internet (IPv4) have a fixed length of 32 bits.
1 In the IPv4 Setting menu, press or to select IP Address.
2 Press [OK]. The IP Address screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the IP address.
You can set any value between 000 and 255.
Increase or reduce the figures by pressing or .
Use and to move the position being entered, which is shown
highlighted.
4 Press [OK]. The IP address is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu
reappears.
Auto-IP:
Off
01
On
02
*
Note When you enter the IP address, be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off.
IP Address:
0. 0. 0. 0
4-73
Operation Panel
Subnet Mask (Subnet mask setting)
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.
A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the
prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and, in this
context, indicates the first section of the IP address.
When an IP address is written, the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash
(/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0"
with a 24-bit prefix (network section).
This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as
the subnet address.
1 In the IPv4 Setting menu, press or to select Subnet Mask.
2 Press [OK]. The Subnet Mask screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the subnet mask.
You can set any value between 000 and 255.
Increase or reduce the figures by pressing or .
Use and to move the position being entered, which is shown
highlighted.
4 Press [OK]. The subnet mask setting is stored and the IPv4
Setting menu reappears.
Default Gateway (Gateway setting)
Gateway generally refers to a protocol conversion device used to allow networks with differing protocol systems to
interconnect.
For example, a "Gateway" device is required to connect a different closed network (using its own protocols) to the open
Internet (using TCP/IP).
By installing a gateway, the communications protocols and data display modes on different networks can be made
compatible.
On TCP/IP networks, the term gateway is used to refer to routers.
1 In the IPv4 Setting menu, press or to select Default
Gateway.
2 Press [OK]. The Default Gateway screen appears.
Note When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off.
Note Before you enter the gateway, be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off.
Operation Panel
4-74
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the default gateway.
You can set any value between 000 and 255.
Increase or reduce the figures by pressing or .
Use and to move the position being entered, which is shown
highlighted.
4 Press [OK]. The default gateway is stored and the IPv4 Setting
menu reappears.
IPv6 Setting (TCP/IP IPv6 settings)
This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv6).
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
1 In the TCP/IP Settings menu, press or to select IPv6
Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The IPv6 Setting menu screen appears.
The options available in the TCP/IP (IPv6) settings are as follows:
• TCP/IP (IPv6) (Enable/disable TCP/IP (IPv6))...4-74
• Link Local (Check the IP Address of the machine.)...4-75
• Manual Settings (Manual Settings of TCP / IP (IPv6))...4-75
• RA (Stateless) (RA (Stateless) setting)...4-76
• DHCPv6 (DHCPv6 setting)...4-77
IMPORTANT The Link Local, Manual Settings, RA (Stateless) and
DHCPv6 menu options for TCP/IP (IPv6) are displayed when TCP/IP
(IPv6) is enabled.
TCP/IP (IPv6) (Enable/disable TCP/IP (IPv6))
This specified whether TCP/IP (IPv6) is used.
1 In the IPv6 Setting menu, press or to select TCP/
IP(IPv6).
2 Press [OK]. The TCP/IP(IPv6) screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether TCP/IP (IPv6) is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The TCP/IP (IPv6) setting is set and the IPv6 Setting
menu reappears.
IPv6 Setting:
Exit
01
IPv6 Setting
IPv6 Setting:
Off
01
On
02
*
4-75
Operation Panel
Link Local (Check the IP Address of the machine.)
Check the IP Address of the machine.
1 In the IPv6 Setting menu, press or to select Link Local.
2 Press [OK]. The Link Local screen appears.
Manual Settings (Manual Settings of TCP / IP (IPv6))
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6).
1 In the IPv6 Setting menu, press or to select Manual
Settings.
2 Press [OK]. The Manual Settings menu screen appears.
The options available in the Manual Settings are as follows:
• IP Address (Setting the IP address)...4-75
• Prefix Length (Specify the prefix length)...4-75
• Default Gateway (Gateway setting)...4-76
IP Address (Setting the IP address)
Set the IP address of the TCP/IP (IPv6).
1 In the Manual Settings menu, press or to select IP
Address.
2 Press [OK]. The IP Address screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys to set the IP address.
You can set any value between 0000 and FFFF.
Use and to move the position being entered, which is shown
highlighted.
4 Press [OK]. The IP address is stored and the Manual Settings
menu reappears.
Prefix Length (Specify the prefix length)
Specify the prefix length of TCP/IP (IPv6).
1 In the Manual Settings menu, press or to select Prefix
length.
2 Press [OK]. The Prefix length screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the prefix length.
4 Press [OK]. The prefix length is stored and the Manual Settings
menu reappears.
Note You can set any value between 0 and 128.
Operation Panel
4-76
Default Gateway (Gateway setting)
Specify the default gateway of TCP/IP (IPv6).
1 In the Manual Settings menu, press or to select Default
Gateway.
2 Press [OK]. The Default Gateway screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys to set the default gateway.
You can set any value between 0000 and FFFF.
Use and to move the position being entered, which is shown
highlighted.
4 Press [OK]. The default gateway is stored and the Manual
Settings menu reappears.
RA (Stateless) (RA (Stateless) setting)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information is
the Router Advertisement (RA).
ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is an IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
1 In the IPv6 Setting menu, press or to select
RA(Stateless).
2 Press [OK]. The RA(Stateless) menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select RA(Stateless).
4 Press [OK]. The RA(Stateless) screen appears.
5 Press or to select whether RA (Stateless) is enabled.
6 Press [OK]. The RA (Stateless) setting is set and the IPv6 Setting
menu reappears.
Note Before you enter the gateway, be sure to set the RA(Stateless) setting to Off.
Default Gateway
1123 : 1451 : 1167 : 1189
:1123 : 1451 :1167 : 1189
RA(Stateless):
RA(Stateless)
01
RA(Stateless):
Off
01
On
02
*
Note When On is set, IP addresses are shown in "IP
Address 1 (to 5)" after network restart.
4-77
Operation Panel
DHCPv6 (DHCPv6 setting)
DHCPv6 is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends the
BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the network.
DHCPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node.
Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management workload is
reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
1 In the IPv6 Setting menu, press or to select DHCPv6.
2 Press [OK]. The DHCPv6 menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select DHCPv6.
4 Press [OK]. The DHCPv6 screen appears.
5 Press or to select whether DHCPv6 is enabled.
6 Press [OK]. The DHCPv6 setting is set and the IPv6 Setting
menu reappears.
LAN Interface (LAN Interface setting)
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
1 In the Wired Netwk. Set menu, press or to select LAN
Interface.
2 Press [OK]. The LAN Interface screen appears.
The available LAN Interface are as follows:
Auto
10BASE-Half
10BASE-Full
100BASE-Half
100BASE-Full
1000BASE-T
3 Press or to select the desired LAN Interface.
4 Press [OK]. The LAN Interface is set and the Wired Netwk. Set
menu reappears.
Note When On is set, IP addresses are shown in "IP
Address" after network restart.
Operation Panel
4-78
ProtocolSettings (Detailed settings for the network protocol)
This selects the settings for Protocol Detail.
Item Description
Restarting the System
†
†
: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.
×: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.
Bonjour
††
††
Set whether the setting is enabled on each network when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
Select whether to use Bonjour.
IPSec Make this setting when you use IPSec.
NetBEUI
††
Selects whether or not to receive documents using
NetBEUI.
SNMPv3
††
Set SNMPv3.
FTP (Server)
††
Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP.
SNMP
††
Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP.
SMTP Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP.
POP3 Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3.
RAW Port
††
Select whether or not to communicate using RAW Port.
LPD
††
Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as
the network protocol.
IPP
††
Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the
IPP protocol, select Not Secure (IPP&IPPS) on IPP
Security under Security Settings from the Embedded Web
Server RX. The default port number is 631.
IPP Over SSL
††
Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL.
HTTP
††
Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP.
HTTPS
††
Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.
LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP.
ThinPrint
††
Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print
protocol, set the protocol to On. The default port number is
4000.
Also, to use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set Thin
Print Over SSL to On.
Note This function is displayed only when the optional
ThinPrint Option (UG-33) is activated.
WSD-PRINT
††
Set whether to use our proprietary web services.
EnhancedWSD
††
Set whether to use our proprietary web services.
Enhanced WSD(SSL)
††
Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.
4-79
Operation Panel
Use the procedure below.
1 In the Network menu, press or to select ProtocolSettings.
2 Press [OK]. The ProtocolSettings menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select the item for which you want to make settings.
4 Press [OK]. This displays the setting screen for the item selected in
step 3.
The screen shown is the one when IPP is selected.
5 Press or to select Off/On.
6 Press [OK]. The Off/On screen appears.
7 Press or to select On or Off.
8 Press [OK]. The IPP menu screen reappears.
Port Number (Port Number settings)
Specify the port number.
1 Press or key in the menu screen of the selected item, and select
the Port Number.
2 Press [OK]. The Port Number screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the Port Number.
4 Press [OK]. The Port Number is set and the menu screen of the
selected item reappears.
Available Net. (Protocol settings of each network)
Set whether to enable this function for each network.
1 Press or key in the menu screen of the selected item, and select
the Available Net.
Note This function appears when "IPP" or "ThinPrint" is selected in Protocol Settings (Detailed
settings for the network protocol) on page 4-25.
Note This setting is is only displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
Operation Panel
4-80
2 Press [OK]. The Available Net. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select the item for which you want to make settings.
4 Press [OK]. This displays the setting screen for the item selected in
step 3.
The screen shown is the one when Wi-Fi Direct is selected.
5 Press or to select Disable or Enable.
6 Press [OK]. The Available Net. menu screen reappears.
Primary Network (Select the network interface to use)
Specify the network to be used for the send function, the network authentication.
1 In the Network menu, press or to select Primary Network.
2 Press [OK]. The Primary Network screen appears.
3 Press or to select Wi-Fi, Wired Network or Optional
Network.
4 Press [OK]. The Primary Network is set and the Network menu
reappears.
Ping (Checking the connection of a connected device)
Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the destination is possible.
1 In the Network menu, press or to select Ping.
2 Press [OK]. The Ping screen appears.
Available Net.:
Wired Network
03
Wi-Fi
02
01
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct:
Enable
02
01
Disable
*
Note This setting is is only displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface
Kit (IB-51 or IB-36) is installed.
Primary Network:
Wi-Fi
Wired Network
01
02
*
Optional Network
03
Note Wi-Fi is only displayed when the optional Wireless
Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed.
Optional Network is only displayed when the optional
Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit
(IB-51) is installed.
Note This setting is displayed when the setting for Primary Network (Select the network interface to use) on page
4-80 is set to other than Optional Network.
Ping:
Text
ABC
4-81
Operation Panel
3 Use the numeric keys to enter the host name or IP address.
4 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
5 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Pinging
destination host... appears.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the screen of step 3.
6 Press [OK]. The Network menu reappears.
Restart Network (Restarting the network card)
After all network related settings have been done, restart the network card of the device. This is mandatory to make the
settings effective.
1 In the Network menu, press or to select Restart Network.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Restarting...
Please wait. appears and the network is restarted.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Network menu
without restarting the network.
Note For details on entering characters, refer to Character
Entry Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-82
Optional Network (Optional Network settings)
This selects the settings for the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51).
The options available in the Optional Network settings are as follows:
• Wireless Network (Wireless network settings)...4-83
• Basic (Basic settings for the optional Network Interface Kit)...4-89
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Optional Network.
3 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
4 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
6 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
Note This is only displayed when a Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is
installed as an option.
Note Check with your network administrator when selecting the network setting. After all network related settings
have been done, restart the network. Refer to Restart Network (Restarting the optional Network Interface Kit) on
page 4-92. This is mandatory to make the settings effective!
When the web page for IB-50 or IB-51 is used, network parameters and security settings can be conveniently
changed and checked from your PC. For more information, refer to the IB-50/IB-51 User's Manual.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the Optional Network menu screen
is displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Login User Name:
Text
ABC
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
4-83
Operation Panel
7 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
9 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the Optional Network menu
appears showing a list of available options.
Wireless Network (Wireless network settings)
This selects the settings for Wireless network.
1 In the Optional Network menu, press or to select Wireless
Network.
2 Press [OK]. The Wireless Network menu screen appears.
The following operations are possible:
• ConnectionStatus (Wireless network connection status check)...4-
83
• Quick Setup (Quick setup for the wireless network)...4-84
• Custom Setup (Detailed settings for the wireless network)...4-86
ConnectionStatus (Wireless network connection status check)
When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed, you can check the status of the wireless network.
1 In the Wireless Network menu, press or to select
ConnectionStatus.
2 Press [OK]. The ConnectionStatus screen appears.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Note Wireless Network is only displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
Operation Panel
4-84
3 Press or . The NetwkName(SSID) is displayed.
If the entire name shown as the NetwkName(SSID)will not fit on one
line, pressing [Detail] ([Right Select]) changes to a 3-line name
display.
Quick Setup (Quick setup for the wireless network)
When connecting to an access point which supports the automatic wireless network setup, you can select the connection
settings using Quick Setup.
1 In the Wireless Network menu, press or to select Quick
Setup.
2 Press [OK]. The Quick Setup menu screen appears.
The following operations are possible:
• AvailableNetwork (Display the access points)
• Push Button (Connect using Push Button)
• PIN (Device) (Connect using a PIN code (for the Wireless Network
Interface Kit))
• PIN (Terminal) (Connect using a PIN code (for the access point))
AvailableNetwork (Display the access points)
Displays the access points which can be connected to.
1 In the Quick Setup menu, press or to AvailableNetwork.
2 Press [OK]. The AvailableNetwork screen appears.
3 Press or to select the access point to connect to.
4 Press [OK]. The connection with the access point is started.
When it is necessary to enter an encryption key, the WEP Key entry
screen or Preshared Key entry screen appears.
When a WEP Key must be entered:
Enter the WEP Key using the numeric keys and press [OK].
When a Preshared Key must be entered:
Enter the Preshared Key using the numeric keys and press [OK].
ConnectionStatus:
Detail
NetwkName(SSID): 2/ 2
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
Detail:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU
VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz1234567890
Quick Setup:
PIN (Device)
Exit
03
Push Button
02
01
AvailableNetwork
AvailableNetwork:
AccessPoint_003
Reload
AccessPoint_002
AccessPoint_001
Note If you cannot find the desired access point, press
[Reload] ([Right Select]) to update the information.
WEP Key:
Text
ABC
Up to 26 characters can be entered. For details on entering
characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2.
Preshared Key:
Text
ABC
Note The number of characters is between 8 and 64. For
details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
4-85
Operation Panel
Push Button (Connect using Push Button)
When the access point supports the automatic wireless network setup button, you can configure the wireless settings
automatically using the button and the panel operation of the printer.
1 In the Quick Setup menu, press or to select Push Button.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press the automatic wireless network setup button on the access
point.
4 Press [Next] ([Right Select]). The message Connecting...
appears and the connection with the access point starts.
PIN (Device) (Connect using a PIN code (for the Wireless Network Interface Kit))
The connection is started using the PIN code for the machine. The PIN code displayed should be entered at the access
point. The PIN code for the machine is generated automatically.
1 In the Quick Setup menu, press or to select PIN (Device).
2 Press [OK]. A PIN code is displayed on the Message display.
3 Write down the PIN code displayed on the Message display.
4 Press [Next] ([Right Select]). The message Connecting...
appears.
5 At the access point, immediately enter the PIN code which wrote
down on step 3. The connection with the access point starts.
PIN (Terminal) (Connect using a PIN code (for the access point))
The connection is started using the PIN code for the access point. Enter the PIN code for the access point. For details of
the PIN code for the access point, refer to the Operation Guide of the access point.
1 In the Quick Setup menu, press or to select PIN
(Terminal).
2 Press [OK]. The PIN code entry screen appears.
3 Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. The message Connecting... appears and the
connection with the access point starts.
PIN code
Note Up to 8 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Operation Panel
4-86
Custom Setup (Detailed settings for the wireless network)
It is possible to change the detailed settings of the wireless network.
1 In the Wireless Network menu, press or to select Custom
Setup.
2 Press [OK]. The Custom Setup menu screen appears.
The following operations are possible:
• Netwk Name (SSID) (Registration of the access point's SSID)
• Connection Mode (Switch between connection modes)
• Channel (Channel settings)
• Netwk Authentic. (Network Authentication setting)
• Encryption (Encryption settings)
Netwk Name (SSID) (Registration of the access point's SSID)
This sets the SSID (Service Set Identifier) for the wireless network access point the machine will be connected to.
1 In the Custom Setup menu, press or to select Netwk
Name(SSID).
2 Press [OK]. The Netwk Name(SSID) entry screen appears.
3 Enter the access point's SSID using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. The Custom Setup menu reappears.
Connection Mode (Switch between connection modes)
This selects the method for connecting to the wireless network. Set Ad Hoc when machines will be connected directly with
each other, without going through an access point.
1 In the Custom Setup menu, press or to select Connection
Mode.
2 Press [OK]. The Connection Mode screen appears.
The available Connection Mode are as follows:
Ad Hoc (Connect without going through access points)
Infrastructure (Connect via an access point)
3 Press or to select the connection mode.
4 Press [OK]. The Custom Setup menu reappears.
Channel (Channel settings)
This sets the Channel to be used in the wireless network.
1 In the Custom Setup menu, press or to select Channel.
Custom Setup:
Channel
03
Connection Mode
02
01
Netwk Name(SSID)
Connect Exit
Netwk Name(SSID):
Text
ABC
Note Up to 32 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Connection Mode:
Ad Hoc
01
Infrastructure
02
*
4-87
Operation Panel
2 Press [OK]. The Channel screen appears.
3 Enter the Channel number using the numeric keys, or .
4 Press [OK]. The Custom Setup menu reappears.
Netwk Authentic. (Network Authentication setting)
This sets the authentication method to be used when connecting to an access point.
1 In the Custom Setup menu, press or to select Netwk
Authentic..
2 Press [OK]. The Netwk Authentic. screen appears.
The available authentication methods are as follows:
Open
Shared
WPA-PSK
WPA2-PSK
3 Press or to select the desired authentication method.
4 Press [OK]. The Custom Setup menu reappears.
Encryption (Encryption settings)
This selects the encryption settings.
1 In the Custom Setup menu, press or to select Encryption.
2 Press [OK]. The Encryption screen appears.
The following operations are possible:
• Data Encryption (Data Encryption setting)...4-88
• WEP Key (WEP Key settings)...4-88
• Preshared Key (Preshared Key settings)...4-88
Note The Channel can be set between 1 and 11.
Note You can also configure the network authentication setting for WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise using
the web page of the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51). For details, refer to the IB-51 User's Manual.
Note WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK are only displayed when
Infrastructure has been set as the Connection Mode
(Switch between connection modes) on page 4-86.
Note This setting is not displayed when the setting for Netwk Authentic. (Network Authentication setting) on page
4-87 is set to use an authentication method other than Open, Shared, WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK, using Utility.
Note WEP Key is displayed when Netwk Authentic.
(Network Authentication setting) on page 4-87 is set to Open
or Shared.
Preshared Key is displayed when Netwk Authentic.
(Network Authentication setting) on page 4-87 is set to WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK.
Operation Panel
4-88
Data Encryption (Data Encryption setting)
This sets the encryption method.
1 In the Encryption menu, press or to select Data
Encryption.
2 Press [OK]. The Data Encryption screen appears.
3 Press or to select the desired encryption method.
4 Press [OK]. The Encryption menu reappears.
WEP Key (WEP Key settings)
This registers the WEP Key.
1 In the Encryption menu, press or to select WEP Key.
2 Press [OK]. The WEP Key screen appears.
3 Press[Edit] ([Right Select]). The WEP Key entry screen appears.
4 Enter the WEP Key using the numeric keys.
5 Press [OK]. The Encryption menu reappears.
Preshared Key (Preshared Key settings)
This registers the Preshared Key.
1 In the Encryption menu, press or to select Preshared Key.
2 Press [OK]. The Preshared Key screen appears.
Data Encryption:
Disable
01
WEP
02
*
Note The encryption methods that can be selected vary
depending on the authentication method set in Netwk
Authentic. (Network Authentication setting) on page 4-87.
Disable or WEP can be selected when Open or Shared is
set.
TKIP, AES or Auto can be selected when WPA-PSK is set.
AES can be selected when WPA2-PSK is set.
WEP Key:
Edit
WEP Key:
Text
ABC
Note Up to 26 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Preshared Key:
Edit
4-89
Operation Panel
3 Press[Edit] ([Right Select]). The Preshared Key entry screen
appears.
4 Enter the Preshared Key using the numeric keys.
5 Press [OK]. The Encryption menu reappears.
Basic (Basic settings for the optional Network Interface Kit)
This selects the basic settings for the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-
51) network.
1 In the Optional Network menu, press or to select Basic.
2 Press [OK]. The Basic menu screen appears.
The following operations are possible:
• TCP/IP Settings (TCP/IP Settings for the optional Network
Interface Kit)...4-89
• Netware (NetWare setting)...4-90
• AppleTalk (AppleTalk setting)...4-90
• IPSec (IPSec setting)...4-91
• LAN Interface (LAN Interface setting)...4-91
• MACAddressFilter (MAC address filtering setting)...4-91
• Restart Network (Restarting the optional Network Interface Kit)...4-
92
TCP/IP Settings (TCP/IP Settings for the optional Network Interface Kit)
This selects the TCP/IP settings.
The options available in the TCP/IP Settings are as follows:
• TCP/IP (Enable/Disable TCP/IP)
• IPv4 Setting (TCP/IP IPv4 settings)
• IPv6 Setting (TCP/IP IPv6 settings)
1 In the Basic menu, press or to select TCP/IP Settings.
2 Press [OK]. The TCP/IP Settings menu screen appears.
TCP/IP (Enable/Disable TCP/IP)
This specified whether TCP/IP is used.
The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For details, refer to TCP/IP (Enable/Disable TCP/
IP) on page 4-71.
Note The number of characters is between 8 and 64. For
details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-90
IPv4 Setting (TCP/IP IPv4 settings)
This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv4). The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For
details, refer to IPv4 Setting (TCP/IP IPv4 settings) on page 4-71.
IPv6 Setting (TCP/IP IPv6 settings)
This selects the settings for TCP/IP (IPv6). The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings. For
details, refer to IPv6 Setting (TCP/IP IPv6 settings) on page 4-74.
Netware (NetWare setting)
NetWare is a PC-based network operating system specifically for servers. NetWare is a client-server system that operates
by installing the NetWare OS on the server and dedicated client modules (NetWare clients) on the client machines (running
MS-DOS, OS/2, Windows, etc.). The basic network layer protocol used is NetWare's own IPX (Internetwork Packet
eXchange)/SPX (Sequenced Packet eXchange), but the system also supports TCP/IP.
The feature of the NetWare OS is that it is specifically for servers, unlike general-purpose operating systems such as
Windows NT and UNIX. Only the minimum required for server operation can be performed from the NetWare OS console
on the server. Server and file management is basically carried out using management tools from the clients. Also, all drivers
and protocol stacks are in the form of modules called NetWare Loadable Modules (NLMs), and the ability of NLMs to load
and unload flexibly and dynamically is a major advantage of this system.
1 In the Basic menu, press or to select Netware.
2 Press [OK]. The Netware screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether NetWare is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The NetWare setting is set and the Basic menu
reappears.
AppleTalk (AppleTalk setting)
AppleTalk is a communications protocol used primarily on Macintosh computers and also refers to the Mac OS network
functions.
AppleTalk assigns 24-bit network addresses (a 16-bit network section and an 8-bit node address) that are used to identify
devices (computers, printers, etc.) on the network.
When the power is turned on, a broadcast signal is sent out onto the network and the addresses and machine names are
automatically assigned.
1 In the Basic menu, press or to select AppleTalk.
2 Press [OK]. The AppleTalk screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether AppleTalk is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The AppleTalk setting is set and the Basic menu
reappears.
NetWare:
Off
01
On
02
*
AppleTalk:
Off
01
On
02
*
4-91
Operation Panel
IPSec (IPSec setting)
IPSec (IP Security Protocol) is a security protocol adopted as the standard by the IETF for authentication and encryption in
the third network layer (IP layer).
It can be used with both IPv4 and IPv6.
1 In the Basic menu, press or to select IPSec.
2 Press [OK]. The IPSec screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether IPSec is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The IPSec setting is set and the Basic menu reappears.
LAN Interface (LAN Interface setting)
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto.
1 In the Basic menu, press or to select LAN Interface.
2 Press [OK]. The LAN Interface screen appears.
The available LAN Interface are as follows:
Auto
10BASE-Half
10BASE-Full
100BASE-Half
100BASE-Full
1000BASE-T
3 Press or to select the desired LAN Interface.
4 Press [OK]. The LAN Interface is set and the Basic menu
reappears.
MACAddressFilter (MAC address filtering setting)
This sets whether or not to enable MAC address filtering.
1 In the Basic menu, press or to select MACAddressFilter.
2 Press [OK]. The MACAddressFilter screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether MAC address filtering is enabled.
Note IPv4 uses 32-bit IP addresses and IPv6 uses 128-bit IP addresses.
Note LAN Interface is only displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) is installed.
Note The detailed settings for MAC address filtering are selected using the optional Network Interface Kit utility
software.
Operation Panel
4-92
4 Press [OK]. The MAC address filtering setting is set and the Basic
menu reappears.
Restart Network (Restarting the optional Network Interface Kit)
After all network related settings have been done, restart the network card of the device. This is mandatory to make the
settings effective.
1 In the Basic menu, press or to select Restart Network.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Restarting...
Please wait. appears and the network is restarted.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Basic menu without
restarting the network.
Restart.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
4-93
Operation Panel
Device Common (Selecting/Setting the common device)
Selects/sets all the functions in this printer.
The options available in Device Common are as follows:
• Language (Selecting the message language)...4-93
• Def. Screen(Box) (Document Box default screen setting)...4-94
• Date Setting (Date and time settings)...4-95
• Buzzer (Alarm (Buzzer) setting)...4-98
• RAM Disk Setting (Using the RAM disk)...4-100
• Format SSD (Formatting the SSD)...4-101
• Format SD Card (Formatting the SD card)...4-102
• Display Bright. (Display brightness setting)...4-102
• Disp. Backlight (Display backlight setting)...4-103
• Error Handling (Error detection setting)...4-103
• Timer Setting...4-105
• Disp. Status/Log (Display Status/Log setting)...4-117
• USB KeyboardType (USB keyboard type selection)...4-118
• Low Toner Alert (Setting for the alert level for toner addition)...4-119
• Msg Banner Print (Check setting before banner printing)...4-120
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Device Common.
3 Press [OK]. The Device Common menu appears showing a list of
available options.
Language (Selecting the message language)
You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below. You can optionally download
messages in other languages. Contact your service technician for information.
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Language.
2 Press [OK]. The Language screen appears showing the list of
languages.
The available languages are as follows:
English
Deutsch
Français
Español
Italiano
Nederlands
Русский
Português
IMPORTANT Def. Screen(Box), Format SSD and Format SD Card only appear when the relevant option is
installed.
Operation Panel
4-94
The optional languages are as follows:
If you are using one of the optional languages, it is displayed in place
of Português.
3 Press or to select the desired language.
4 Press [OK]. The language is set and the Device Common menu
reappears.
Def. Screen(Box) (Document Box default screen setting)
Select the screen to be displayed when [Document Box] is pressed.
1 In the Device Common menu screen, press or to select Def.
Screen(Box).
2 Press [OK]. The Def. Screen(Box) screen appears.
3 Press or to select either Custom BOX or Job BOX as the default
screen.
4 Press [OK]. The default screen is set and the Device Common menu
reappears.
Optional language Message display
Turkish Türkçe
Greek Ελληνικά
Polish Polski
Czech
Hungarian Magyar
Finnish Suomi
Hebrew
Arabic
Swedish Svenska
Danish Dansk
Norwegian Norsk
Romanian
Note To add an optional language, contact your service
representative or authorized service center.
Def. Screen(Box):
Custom Box
01
Job Box
02
*
4-95
Operation Panel
Date Setting (Date and time settings)
Set the date and time.
The date and time settings consist of the following items:
• Date (date setting)...4-96
• Time (time setting)...4-96
• Date Format (date format selection)...4-97
• Time Zone (time difference setting)...4-97
• Summer Time (summer time setting)...4-97
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Date
Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
3 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
4 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
5 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
6 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
IMPORTANT To change the Date Setting, the administrator's Login User Name and Login Password must be
entered. For details of the administrator settings, refer to Administrator on page 4-136.
If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the application.
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the Date Setting menu screen is
displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-96
7 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
8 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the Date Setting menu appears
showing a list of available options.
Date (date setting)
1 In the Date Setting menu, press or to select Date.
2 Press [OK]. The Date screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the year, month, and
day.
Use and to move the cursor right and left.
4 Press [OK]. The date is set and the Date Setting menu
reappears.
Time (time setting)
1 In the Date Setting menu, press or to select Time.
2 Press [OK]. The Time screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or or to set the hour, minute, and second.
Use and to move the cursor right and left.
4 Press [OK]. The time is set and the Date Setting menu reappears.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Date Setting:
Date Format
Exit
03
Time
02
01
Date
Date:
Year
2016
Month Day
/
Time Zone( Osaka, Sa )
08 / 20
:
Time:
Hour
11
Min. Second
: 45 : 50
Time Zone:( Greenwich )
4-97
Operation Panel
Date Format (date format selection)
One of three formats can be selected for the date format.
1 In the Date Setting menu, press or to select Date Format.
2 Press [OK]. The Date Format screen appears.
3 Press or to select the desired date format.
The following date formats can be selected:
Month/Day/Year
Day/Month/Year
Year/Month/Day
4 Press [OK]. The date format is set and the Date Setting menu
reappears.
Time Zone (time difference setting)
Set the time difference from GMT.
1 In the Date Setting menu, press or to select Time Zone.
2 Press [OK]. The Time Zone screen appears.
3 Press or to select the location.
4 Press [OK]. The time zone is set and the Date Setting menu
reappears.
Summer Time (summer time setting)
Set summer time.
1 In the Date Setting menu, press or to select Summer Time.
2 Press [OK]. The Summer Time screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether the summer time is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The summer time is set and the Date Setting menu
reappears.
Note If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the
summer time setting will not appear.
Operation Panel
4-98
Buzzer (Alarm (Buzzer) setting)
This function uses tones to notify the user of printer operations and the printer status. This setting is useful, for example,
when the printer is located some distance from the user.
The options available in Buzzer are as follows:
• Key Confirmation (Key confirmation tone setting)...4-98
• Job Finish (Job completed tone setting)...4-98
• Ready (Preparation completed tone setting)...4-99
• Error (Error tone setting)...4-99
• Keyboard Confirm (Keyboard confirmation tone setting)...4-99
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Buzzer.
2 Press [OK]. The Buzzer screen appears.
Key Confirmation (Key confirmation tone setting)
When On is selected in this setting, a tone sounds each time a key is used.
1 In the Buzzer menu screen, press or to select Key
Confirmation.
2 Press [OK]. The Key Confirmation screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether the key confirmation tone is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The key confirmation tone setting is set and the Buzzer
menu reappears.
Job Finish (Job completed tone setting)
When On is selected in this setting, a tone sounds when printing ends.
1 In the Buzzer menu screen, press or to select Job Finish.
2 Press [OK]. The Job Finish screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether the printing completed tone is
enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The printing completed tone setting is set and the
Buzzer menu reappears.
Buzzer:
Ready
Exit
03
Job Finish
02
01
Key Confirmation
Key Confirmation:
Off
01
On
02
*
Job Finish:
Off
01
On
02
*
4-99
Operation Panel
Ready (Preparation completed tone setting)
When On is selected in this setting, a tone sounds when print preparation has been completed.
1 In the Buzzer menu screen, press or to select Ready.
2 Press [OK]. The Ready screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether the preparation completed tone is
enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The preparation completed tone setting is set and the
Buzzer menu reappears.
Error (Error tone setting)
When On is selected in this setting, a tone sounds when a problem such as running out of paper or a paper jam occurs
during printing.
1 In the Buzzer menu screen, press or to select Error.
2 Press [OK]. The Error screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether the warning tone is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The warning tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu
reappears.
Keyboard Confirm (Keyboard confirmation tone setting)
When On is selected in this setting, a tone sounds each time a USB keyboard is used.
1 In the Buzzer menu screen, press or to select Keyboard
Confirm.
2 Press [OK]. The Keyboard Confirm screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether the keyboard confirmation tone is
enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The Keyboard Confirm tone setting is set and the
Buzzer menu reappears.
Operation Panel
4-100
RAM Disk Setting (Using the RAM disk)
The RAM disk is a memory space shared within the printer memory that can temporarily store print jobs. The stored print
job can then be used to print multiple copies of the job reducing the total amount of time required to print the whole job. It
acts similar to the SSD except that the data is effective only when the printer is powered up.
To use the RAM disk, activate and enter the desired size of the RAM disk in the manner described below. The maximum
RAM disk size can be calculated as follows:
When the RAM disk is activated = The maximum RAM disk size is 16 MB (when no options are attached.)
When the optional memory is installed, the setting range varies depending on the amount of optional memory.
To activate RAM disk in the printer's memory, first you must set the RAM disk mode to On and set the desired data size for
the RAM disk as described in the following section. This allows you to perform the following operations on the RAM disk.
The options available in RAM Disk Setting are as follows:
• RAM Disk Mode (Setting the RAM disk)...4-100
• RAM Disk Size (RAM disk size setting)...4-101
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select RAM Disk
Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The RAM Disk Setting menu screen appears.
RAM Disk Mode (Setting the RAM disk)
Selecting On in this setting enables the RAM disk.
1 In the RAM Disk Setting menu, press or to select RAM Disk
Mode.
2 Press [OK]. The RAM Disk Mode screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether the RAM disk is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The RAM disk setting is set and the RAM Disk
Setting menu reappears.
Note The RAM disk is an allocated part of the printer’s memory.
IMPORTANT The RAM disk can not be used when an optional SSD is installed.
The RAM disk stores data only temporarily. When the printer is reset or turned off, the stored data will be erased.
The RAM disk allows some Job Box functions to be used.
The RAM disk is allocated from the printer memory available to users. If the size of the RAM disk is set too large, the
printing speed may decrease or the memory may become insufficient.
RAM Disk Setting:
RAM Disk Mode
Exit
RAM Disk Size
01
02
RAM Disk Mode:
Off
01
On
02
*
4-101
Operation Panel
RAM Disk Size (RAM disk size setting)
Use this procedure to set the amount of memory used for the RAM disk.
1 In the RAM Disk Setting menu, press or to select RAM Disk
Size.
2 Press [OK]. The RAM Disk Size screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the amount of memory
to be used as a RAM disk.
The maximum amount of memory that can be set varies depending
on the total amount of memory in the printer.
4 Press [OK]. The amount of memory used as a RAM disk is stored and
the RAM Disk Setting menu reappears.
When you have completed the setting, exit the menu and restart the
printer. The selected setting is valid after the printer starts up again.
Format SSD (Formatting the SSD)
When an optional SSD is inserted into the printer for the first time, it must be formatted before use.
This menu is displayed only when the SSD is installed on the printer.
Use the procedure below to format the SSD.
When a new SSD is inserted in the printer's slot, Format SSD will appear on the message display.
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Format SSD.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The Formatting... screen appears
and SSD formatting begins. Once the formatting ends, the standby
screen reappears.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Device Common
menu without formatting the SSD.
Note If the SSD is installed in the printer, the Document Box will be available. Formatting will destroy any existing
data on a storage device including a used SSD. Formatting of the SSD must be executed from the printer. When the
SSD has not yet been formatted, the Attention indicator flashes and Format SSD is displayed.
Operation Panel
4-102
Format SD Card (Formatting the SD card)
The printer is equipped with a slot for an SD card.
A SD card must be formatted before it can be used in the printer. Formatting allows data to be written to the SD card.
When a new SD card is inserted in the printer's slot, Format SD Card will appear on the message display.
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Format SD
Card.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The Formatting SD card...
screen appears and SD card formatting begins. Once the formatting
ends, the standby screen reappears.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Device Common
menu without formatting the SD card.
Display Bright. (Display brightness setting)
Sets the brightness of the message display.
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Display
Bright..
2 Press [OK]. The Display Bright. screen appears showing the
available brightness settings.
The list shows the following brightness settings:
Darker -2
Darker -1
Normal 0
Lighter +1
Lighter +2
3 Press or to select the desired brightness.
4 Press [OK]. The brightness is set and the Device Common menu
reappears.
Note Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SD card.
Formatting of the SD card must be executed from the printer.
Format.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
SD Card
Display Bright.:
Darker -2
01
Darker -1
02
*Normal 0
03
4-103
Operation Panel
Disp. Backlight (Display backlight setting)
Set the backlight for the message display.
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Disp.
Backlight.
2 Press [OK]. The Disp. Backlight screen appears.
The list shows the following display backlight settings:
On (Standard)
Off (No backlight)
Touched (Backlight lights up when the key on the operation panel is
pressed)
3 Press or to select the desired backlight setting.
4 Press [OK]. The backlight setting is set and the Device Common
menu reappears.
Error Handling (Error detection setting)
This specifies the settings for the detection methods used for duplex printing errors and for paper size and paper type errors
when the paper source is fixed.
The options available in Error Handling are as follows:
• DuplexPaperError (Duplex printing error detection setting)...4-103
• Paper Mismatch (Detection settings for paper size/type errors when the paper source is fixed)...4-104
• InsertMismatch (Action when size error occurs during paper feeding)...4-104
• MP Tray Empty (Warning when the MP tray is empty)...4-104
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Error
Handling.
2 Press [OK]. The Error Handling menu screen appears.
DuplexPaperError (Duplex printing error detection setting)
If the error detection setting for duplex printing has been turned Display Error, and you attempt to print onto a paper
size and paper type that cannot be used for duplex printing, the Duplex disabled error message will be displayed and
printing will stop.
1 In the Error Handling menu, press or to select
DuplexPaperError.
Note If Touched is selected, the backlight turns off again
when the panel is reset after the setting time of Auto Panel
Reset has passed or when [Logout] is pressed.
1-sided • To print onto one-side of the paper.
Display
Error
• To print onto one-side of the paper only when this message is displayed, press [OK].
• Press [Cancel] to cancel the printing itself.
Operation Panel
4-104
2 Press [OK]. The DuplexPaperError screen appears.
3 Press or to select the setting for handling duplex paper errors.
4 Press [OK]. The handling of duplex paper errors is set and the Error
Handling menu screen reappears.
Paper Mismatch (Detection settings for paper size/type errors when the paper source is
fixed)
Select Continue in this setting if you want to continue printing even if the paper size or type you specified is different from
the fixed paper source, or select Display Error to have the paper feed error displayed.
1 In the Error Handling menu, press or to select Paper
Mismatch.
2 Press [OK]. The Paper Mismatch screen appears.
3 Press or to select the setting for handling paper mismatch
errors.
4 Press [OK]. The handling of paper mismatch errors is set and the
Error Handling menu screen reappears.
InsertMismatch (Action when size error occurs during paper feeding)
If the paper size you specified is different from the size of the paper that is fed when printing using a fixed paper source, you
can select Continue to continue printing, or Display Error to have the paper feed error displayed.
1 In the Error Handling menu, press or to select
InsertMismatch.
2 Press [OK]. The InsertMismatch screen appears.
3 Press or to select the setting for handling Insert Mismatch
errors.
4 Press [OK]. The handling of Insert Mismatch errors is set and the
Error Handling menu screen reappears.
MP Tray Empty (Warning when the MP tray is empty)
Turn this setting to On if you want the error displayed when the MP tray is configured as the default paper source, and there
is no paper in the MP tray, or turn it to Off not to have the error displayed.
The setting On enables the paper-empty message to display when the MP tray is empty.
1 In the Error Handling menu, press or to select MP Tray
Empty.
DuplexPaperError:
1-sided
01
Display Error
02
*
Paper Mismatch:
Continue
01
Display Error
02
*
InsertMismatch:
Continue
01
Display Error
02
*
4-105
Operation Panel
2 Press [OK]. The MP Tray Empty screen appears.
3 Press or to select the setting for the paper-empty message to
display.
4 Press [OK]. The display of MP Tray Empty is set and the Error
Handling menu screen reappears.
Timer Setting
This specifies timer-related settings such as the automatic form-feed timeout and the timeout settings for Auto Sleep.
The options available in Timer Setting are as follows:
• Auto Panel Reset (Auto panel reset setting)...4-107
• PanelReset Timer (Setting the panel reset timer)...4-107
• Sleep Level Set. (Sleep level setting)...4-108
• Sleep Timer (Sleep timer timeout time)...4-110
• Power Off Rule (Power Off Rule setting) (for Europe)...4-110
• Power Off Timer (Power off timer settings) (for Europe)...4-111
• WeeklyTimer Set. (WeeklyTimer Settings)...4-112
• Auto Err. Clear (Auto error clear setting)...4-115
• Err. Clear Timer (Setting the error clear time)...4-116
• FormFeed TimeOut (Automatic form feed timeout setting)...4-116
• Ping Timeout (Setting the Ping Timeout time)...4-116
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Timer
Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
3 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
IMPORTANT To change the Timer Setting, the administrator's Login User Name and Login Password must be
entered. For details of the administrator settings, refer to Administrator on page 4-136.
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the Timer Setting menu screen is
displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Operation Panel
4-106
4 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
5 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
6 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
7 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
8 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the Timer Setting menu appears
showing a list of available options.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
Login Password:
Text
ABC
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Timer Setting:
Sleep Level Set.
Exit
03
PanelReset Timer
02
01
Auto Panel Reset
4-107
Operation Panel
Auto Panel Reset (Auto panel reset setting)
The Auto Panel Reset function automatically restores the default settings if the panel is not used for a set time.
For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset, refer to PanelReset Timer (Setting the panel reset timer) on page
4-107.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select Auto Panel
Reset.
2 Press [OK]. The Auto Panel Reset screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether Auto Panel Reset is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The Auto Panel Reset setting is set and the Timer
Setting menu reappears.
PanelReset Timer (Setting the panel reset timer)
When Auto Panel Reset is set to On, this sets the time until the panel is automatically reset after the user stops using
the panel.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select PanelReset
Timer.
2 Press [OK]. The PanelReset Timer screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the panel reset time.
4 Press [OK]. The panel reset time setting is stored and the Timer
Setting menu reappears.
Operation Panel
4-108
Sleep Level Set. (Sleep level setting)
For Europe
This sets whether or not the machine enters sleep mode for each function.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select Sleep Level
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Sleep Level Set. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Status.
4 Press [OK]. The Status menu screen appears.
Next set whether or not to use Energy Saver mode for each function.
5 Press or to select which function to set.
6
Press [OK]. The screen for the function selected is displayed.
7
Press or to select whether or not to use sleep mode. Select On
to set the sleep mode.
8
Press [OK]. Set the sleep mode for each function and Status menu
reappears.
Note Sleep Level Set. menu is not displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50), Wireless
Network Interface Kit (IB-51) or Parallel Interface Kit (IB-32B) has been installed.
Sleep Level Set.:
Exit
Status
01
Status:
Card Reader
Exit
03
USB Cable
02
01
Network
Item Default Value
Network (Network interface setting)
On
USB Cable (USB interface setting)
On
Card Reader (ID card reader setting)
Off
NIC (Option Network Interface Kit (NIC) setting)
Off
Parallel Cable (Parallel interface setting)
Off
Note Card Reader is only displayed when the ID card
reader function has been activated.
Parallel Cable is only displayed when the optional
Parallel Interface Kit (IB-32B) has been installed.
Network:
Off
01
On
02
*
Note Repeat steps 5 to 8 to set sleep mode for a different
function.
4-109
Operation Panel
Except for Europe
There are two sleep modes with different levels of sleep: Quick Recovery and Energy Saver.
Quick Recovery Mode: The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver mode.
Energy Saver Mode: This makes it possible to reduce energy consumption even further than with Quick Recovery mode.
With Energy Saver mode, you can set whether to enable the Energy Saver mode for each separate function.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select Sleep Level
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The Sleep Level Set. menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select Sleep Level.
4 Press [OK]. The Sleep Level screen appears.
5 Press or to select Quick Recovery or Energy Saver.
6 Press [OK]. The sleep level is set and the Sleep Level Set.
menu reappears.
When Energy Saver is set, next go on to set whether or not to use
Energy Saver mode for each function.
7 Press or to select Status.
8 Press [OK]. The Status menu screen appears.
Next set whether or not to use Energy Saver mode for each function.
Note
For information on the Quick Recovery mode and Energy Saver mode, refer to Energy Saver Function on page 2-36.
When the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50), Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) or Parallel Interface Kit (IB-
32B) has been installed, the Sleep Level Set. menu is not displayed and the machine will enter the Quick
Recovery mode.
Note Status is only displayed when Energy Saver is set.
Item Default Value
Network (Network interface setting)
On
USB Cable (USB interface setting)
On
Card Reader (ID card reader setting)
Off
NIC (Option Network Interface Kit (NIC) setting)
Off
Parallel Cable (Parallel interface setting)
Off
Note Card Reader is only displayed when the ID card
reader function has been activated.
Parallel Cable is only displayed when the optional
Parallel Interface Kit (IB-32B) has been installed.
Operation Panel
4-110
9 Press or to select which function to set.
10
Press [OK]. The screen for the function selected is displayed.
11
Press or to select whether or not to use Energy Saver mode.
Select On to set the Energy Saver mode.
12
Press [OK]. Set the Energy Saver mode for each function and
Status menu reappears.
Sleep Timer (Sleep timer timeout time)
Set amount of time before entering Sleep. The printer reverts to normal operation mode when the printer receives a print
job, [OK] is pressed or one of the exterior covers is opened.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select Sleep Timer.
2 Press [OK]. The Sleep Timer screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or or to set the sleep time.
The timer can be set between 1 and 120 min (for Europe) or 1 and
240 min (except for Europe).
4 Press [OK]. The sleep time setting is stored and the Timer
Setting menu reappears.
Power Off Rule (Power Off Rule setting) (for Europe)
The Power Off Rule is used to stop the power from automatically turning off when the machine is in certain states or certain
settings are in effect. Rules that can be set and their initial settings are as follows:
Network:
Off
01
On
02
*
Note Repeat steps 9 to 12 to set Energy Saver mode for a
different function.
Sleep Timer:
1
(1 - 120)
min.
Item Default Value
Network (Network interface setting)
Off
USB Cable (USB interface setting)
Off
USB Host (USB memory slot setting)
On
RAM Disk (RAM Disk Mode setting)
†
†
If the Power Off Rule is previously set to On, the machine turns off the power and all the data stored in the RAM Disk is
deleted.
On
NIC (Option Network Interface Kit (NIC) setting)
Off
Parallel I/F (Parallel interface setting)
Off
Note When On is set it automatically turns off.
NIC is only displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50), Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) or
Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) has been installed.
Parallel I/F is only displayed when the optional Parallel Interface Kit (IB-32B) has been installed.
4-111
Operation Panel
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select Power Off
Rule.
2 Press [OK]. The Power Off Rule menu screen appears.
3 Press or to select the condition to be set.
4 Press [OK]. The screen for the condition selected is displayed.
5 Press or to select whether or not to have the power switch off.
6 Press [OK]. Set to switch the power off and the Power Off Rule
menu reappears.
Power Off Timer (Power off timer settings) (for Europe)
The time until the power turns off can be set. The default setting is 3 days.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select Power Off
Timer.
2 Press [OK]. The Power Off Timer screen appears.
3 Press or to select the time until the power goes off automatically.
The times that can be set are 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5
hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5
days, 6 days and 1 week.
4 Press [OK]. Set the time until the power switches off and the Timer
Setting menu reappears.
Note Repeat steps 3 to 6 to set for a different condition.
Operation Panel
4-112
WeeklyTimer Set. (WeeklyTimer Settings)
Configure settings for switching the machine to OFF and waking it automatically at a specified time for each day of the week.
The options available in the WeeklyTimer Set. are as follows:
• Weekly Timer (Weekly Timer settings)...4-112
• Schedule (Schedule settings)...4-112
• Retry Settings (Retry Settings)...4-114
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select WeeklyTimer
Set..
2 Press [OK]. The WeeklyTimer Set. menu screen appears.
Weekly Timer (Weekly Timer settings)
Select whether to use Weekly Timer.
1 In the WeeklyTimer Set. menu, press or to select Weekly
Timer.
2 Press [OK]. The Weekly Timer screen appears.
3 Press or to select On or Off.
4 Press [OK]. The Weekly Timer is set and the WeeklyTimer Set.
menu reappears.
Schedule (Schedule settings)
Set the schedule for machine power off and on.
The options available in the WeeklyTimer Set. are as follows:
• Schedule (Schedule settings)...4-112
• Power On (Power On settings)...4-113
• Power Off (Power Off settings)...4-113
Schedule (Schedule settings)
Specify the time for each day of the week at which the machine turns OFF.
1 In the WeeklyTimer Set. menu, press or to select
Schedule.
2 Press [OK]. The Schedule screen appears.
3 Press or to select the day of the week you want to set.
WeeklyTimer Set.:
Retry Settings
Exit
03
Schedule
02
01
Weekly Timer
Weekly Timer:
Off
01
On
02
*
Schedule:
Menu
Tuesday
Monday
Wednesday
01
02
03
4-113
Operation Panel
4 Press [OK]. The setting screen for the selected day of the week
appears.
Power On (Power On settings)
Set the time at which the machine power will turn on.
1 Press [Change] ([Right Select]). The Power On screen appears.
2 Press or to select Enable.
3 Press [OK]. The Power On Time screen appears.
4 Press or to set the Power On Time.
5 Press [OK]. The set Power On Time is saved and the setting screen
of the selected day reappears.
Power Off (Power Off settings)
Set the time at which the machine power will turn off.
1 Press or . The Power Off screen appears.
2 Press [Change] ([Right Select]). The Power Off screen appears.
3 Press or to select Enable.
4 Press [OK]. The Power Off Time screen appears.
5 Press or to set the Power Off Time.
6 Press [OK]. The set Power Off Time is saved and the setting screen
of the selected day reappears.
Operation Panel
4-114
Retry Settings (Retry Settings)
Select retry settings for machine power off.
The options available in the WeeklyTimer Set. are as follows:
• Retries (Retries settings)...4-114
• Retry Times (Retry Times settings)...4-114
• Retry Interval (Retry Interval settings)...4-114
1 In the WeeklyTimer Set. menu, press or to select Retry
Settings.
2 Press [OK]. The Retry Settings menu screen appears.
Retries (Retries settings)
Set whether retry is attempted.
1 In the Retry Settings menu, press or to select Retries.
2 Press [OK]. The Retries screen appears.
3 Press or to select Limited or Unlimited.
4 Press [OK]. The Retries is set and the Retry Settings menu
reappears.
Retry Times (Retry Times settings)
Set the number of retries.
1 In the Retry Settings menu, press or to select Retry
Times.
2 Press [OK]. The Retry Times screen appears.
3 Press or to set the Retry Times.
4 Press [OK]. The Retry Times setting is stored and the Retry
Settings menu reappears.
Retry Interval (Retry Interval settings)
Set the retry interval.
1 In the Retry Settings menu, press or to select Retry
Interval.
Retry Settings:
Retry Interval
Exit
03
Retry Times
02
01
Retries
Retries:
Limited
01
Unlimited
02
*
Retry Times:
0
(0 - 10)
times
4-115
Operation Panel
2 Press [OK]. The Retry Interval screen appears.
3 Press or to set the Retry Interval.
4 Press [OK]. The Retry Interval setting is stored and the Retry
Settings menu reappears.
Auto Err. Clear (Auto error clear setting)
If an error that still allows you to continue printing occurs, the next received data is automatically printed after a set period
of time elapses.
For example, if the printer is shared over a network as a network printer and one person causes one of the above errors,
after the set period of time elapses, the data sent from the next person is printed.
The auto clear errors are:
KPDL error.
SSD error.
RAM disk error.
SD card error.
Incorrect account ID.
Account error.
Cannot duplex print on this paper.
Job Accounting restriction exceeded.
No multi copies.
USB memory error.
Restricted by Job Accounting.
Job not stored.
For the procedure for setting the automatic error recovery time, refer to Err. Clear Timer (Setting the error clear time) on
page 4-116.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select Auto Err.
Clear.
2 Press [OK]. The Auto Err. Clear screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether automatic error recovery is enabled.
4 Press [OK]. The automatic error recovery setting is set and the
Timer Setting menu reappears.
Operation Panel
4-116
Err. Clear Timer (Setting the error clear time)
If Auto Err. Clear is set to On and a non-fatal error (an error that allows printing to continue) occurs, this setting specifies
the time until the error is recovered and printing resumes.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select Err. Clear
Timer.
2 Press [OK]. The Err. Clear Timer screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the recovery time.
4 Press [OK]. The recovery time setting is stored and the Timer
Setting menu reappears.
FormFeed TimeOut (Automatic form feed timeout setting)
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last
page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select FormFeed
TimeOut.
2 Press [OK]. The FormFeed TimeOut screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the form feed timeout
delay.
4 Press [OK]. The form feed timeout setting is stored and the Timer
Setting menu reappears.
Ping Timeout (Setting the Ping Timeout time)
Set the time until timeout occurs when Ping is executed in Network.
1 In the Timer Setting menu, press or to select Ping
Timeout.
2 Press [OK]. The Ping Timeout screen appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to set the Ping Timeout time.
4 Press [OK]. The Ping Timeout time setting is stored and the Timer
Setting menu reappears.
Err. Clear Timer:
30
(5 - 495)
sec.
FormFeed TimeOut:
5
(5 - 495)
sec.
Ping Timeout:
5
(1 - 30)
sec.
4-117
Operation Panel
Disp. Status/Log (Display Status/Log setting)
Set the display method of the Status/Log.
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Disp.
Status/Log.
2 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
3 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
4 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
5 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
6 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the Disp. Status/Log menu screen
is displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-118
7 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
8 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the Disp. Status/Log menu
screen appears.
9 Press or to select JobsDetailStatus or Jobs Log.
10
Press [OK]. The screen to set the display of jobs is displayed.
The setting of the display is as follows:
Show All (All users can view the jobs)
My Jobs Only (Only the user’s own jobs are displayed.)
Hide All (Only users with administrator privileges can view the
jobs)
11
Press or to select the display setting.
12
Press [OK]. The display method is set and the Disp. Status/Log
menu reappears.
USB KeyboardType (USB keyboard type selection)
Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use.
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select USB
KeyboardType.
2 Press [OK]. The USB KeyboardType screen appears.
The available USB keyboard types are as follows:
US
Europe US
France
Germany
3 Press or to select the desired USB keyboard type.
4 Press [OK]. The USB keyboard type is set and the Device Common
menu reappears.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Disp. Status/Log:
JobsDetailStatus
Exit
Jobs Log
01
02
JobsDetailStatus:
Show All
01
My Jobs Only
02
*
Hide All
03
USB KeyboardType:
US
01
Europe US
02
*
France
03
4-119
Operation Panel
Low Toner Alert (Setting for the alert level for toner addition)
This sets the toner addition alert level displayed on the status monitor.
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Low Toner
Alert.
2 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
3 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
4 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
5 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
6 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
7 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the Low Toner Alert menu screen is
displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-120
8 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the Low Toner Alert menu
screen appears.
9 Press or to select Off/On.
10
Press [OK]. The Off/On screen appears.
11
Press or to select whether Low Toner Alert is enabled.
12
Press [OK]. The Low Toner Alert screen appears.
13
Press or to select Toner Level.
14
Press [OK]. The Toner Level screen appears.
15
Use the numeric keys or press or to set the level at which an
alert will be displayed. The setting is possible between 5 and 100%.
16
Press [OK]. The Toner Level is set and the Low Toner Alert menu
reappears.
Msg Banner Print (Check setting before banner printing)
Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing multiple banner sheets.
1 In the Device Common menu, press or to select Msg Banner
Print.
2 Press [OK]. The Msg Banner Print screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether Msg Banner Print is enabled.
4
Press [OK]. The Msg Banner Print setting is set and the Device
Common menu reappears.
Low Toner Alert:
Off/On
Exit
Toner Level
01
02
Off/On:
Off
01
On
02
*
Low Toner Alert:
Off/On
Exit
Toner Level
01
02
Toner Level:
5
(5 - 100)
%
Msg Banner Print:
Off
01
On
02
*
4-121
Operation Panel
Security (Security function setting)
The security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data.
The options available in Security are as follows:
• Network Security (Network security setting)...4-122
• I/F Block Set. (External interface block setting)...4-123
• Security Level...4-125
• Data Security (Data Security setting)...4-126
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Security.
3 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
4 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
6 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
7 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
IMPORTANT To change the Security function settings, the administrator's Login User Name and Login Password
must be entered. For details of the administrator settings, refer to Administrator on page 4-136.
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the Security menu screen is
displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-122
8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
9 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the Security menu screen
appears.
Network Security (Network security setting)
Use this procedure to specify the security settings for each of the network protocols used.
The options available in Network Security are as follows:
• SSL Setting (SSL Server setting)...4-123
1 In the Security menu, press or to select Network
Security.
2 Press [OK]. The Network Security menu screen appears.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Security:
Security Level
Exit
03
I/F Block Set.
02
01
Network Security
IMPORTANT Check with your network administrator when selecting network settings.
Network Security:
Exit
01
SSL Setting
4-123
Operation Panel
SSL Setting (SSL Server setting)
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) refers to a protocol used to encrypt information sent and received over a network. SSL can
currently be used to encrypt data such as the WWW or FTP files widely used on the Internet so that privacy-related
information, credit card numbers, corporate secrets and other confidential information can be sent and received safely.
SSL servers use this protocol to authenticate servers and clients.
The options available in SSL Setting are as follows:
• SSL (SSL Server setting)...4-123
1 In the Network Security menu, press or to select SSL
Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The SSL Setting menu screen appears.
SSL (SSL Server setting)
Select whether or not to use the SSL server.
1 In the SSL Setting menu, press or to select SSL.
2 Press [OK]. The SSL menu screen appears.
3 In the SSL menu, press or to select Off/On.
4 Press [OK]. The Off/On screen appears.
5 Press or to select whether to use the SSL server.
6 Press [OK]. The SSL server setting is set and the SSL menu
reappears.
I/F Block Set. (External interface block setting)
You can use this to block and thereby protect the interface.
The options available in I/F Block Set. are as follows:
• USB Host (USB Port setting)...4-124
• USB Device (USB interface setting)...4-124
• Option I/F (Optional network interface setting)...4-124
• Parallel I/F (Parallel interface setting)...4-125
• USB Storage (USB memory setting)...4-125
Operation Panel
4-124
1 In the Security menu, press or to select I/F Block Set..
2 Press [OK]. The I/F Block Set. menu screen appears.
USB Host (USB Port setting)
This blocks and protects the USB Port (USB Host).
1 In the I/F Block Set. menu, press or to select USB Host.
2 Press [OK]. The USB Host screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether to block and protect the USB host.
4 Press [OK]. The USB Host setting is set and the I/F Block Set.
menu reappears.
USB Device (USB interface setting)
This blocks and protects the USB interface.
1 In the I/F Block Set. menu, press or to select USB Device.
2 Press [OK]. The USB Device screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether to block and protect the USB device.
4 Press [OK]. The USB Device setting is set and the I/F Block Set.
menu reappears.
Option I/F (Optional network interface setting)
This blocks and protects the optional network interface.
1 In the I/F Block Set. menu, press or to select Option I/F.
2 Press [OK]. The Option I/F screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether to block and protect the optional
network interface.
4 Press [OK]. The Optional I/F setting is set and the I/F Block Set.
menu reappears.
I/F Block Set.:
Option I/F
Exit
03
USB Device
02
01
USB Host
USB Host:
Unblock
01
Block
02
*
USB Device:
Unblock
01
Block
02
*
Option I/F:
Unblock
01
Block
02
*
4-125
Operation Panel
Parallel I/F (Parallel interface setting)
This blocks and protects the parallel interface.
1 In the I/F Block Set. menu, press or to select Parallel
I/F.
2 Press [OK]. The Parallel I/F screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether to block and protect the optional
parallel interface.
4 Press [OK]. The Parallel I/F setting is set and the I/F Block Set.
menu reappears.
USB Storage (USB memory setting)
This blocks and protects the USB storage (USB memory).
1 In the I/F Block Set. menu, press or to select USB
Storage.
2 Press [OK]. The USB Storage screen appears.
3 Press or to select whether to block and protect the USB
memory.
4 Press [OK]. The USB memory setting is set and the I/F Block
Set. menu reappears.
Security Level
The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for
customers to use this menu.
Operation Panel
4-126
Data Security (Data Security setting)
This is to change the Security Password, initialize on optional SSD and sanitizing the stored data.
• SSD Initializ. (SSD Initialization setting)...4-126
• DataSanitization (Sanitizing the stored data)...4-128
1 In the Security menu, press or to select Data Security.
2 Press [OK]. The Data Security menu screen appears.
SSD Initializ. (SSD Initialization setting)
This is to change the Security Password and initialize on optional SSD.
• Security Passwd (Change the Security Password)...4-127
• Initialization (Initialize on optional SSD)...4-127
1 In the Data Security menu, press or to select SSD
Initializ..
2 Press [OK]. The SecurityPassword entry screen appears.
3 Enter the Security Password using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. If the Security Password entered is correct, the SSD
Initializ. menu screen appears. If the Security Password
entered was not correct, Incorrect password is displayed and
the SecurityPassword screen reappears. Enter the correct
Security Password.
Note SSD Initializ. is displayed only when the optional SSD and Data Security Kit are installed.
Data Security:
SSD Initializ.
Exit
DataSanitization
01
02
SecurityPassword:
Text
ABC
Note The initial setting for the Security Password is
"000000". For details on entering characters, refer to
Character Entry Method on page A-2.
SSD Initializ.:
Security Passwd
Exit
Initialization
01
02
4-127
Operation Panel
Security Passwd (Change the Security Password)
Change the Security Password.
1 In the SSD Initializ. menu, press or to select Security
Passwd.
2 Press [OK]. The New Password entry screen appears.
3 Enter the new Security Password using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. The Confirm Password entry screen appears.
5 To confirm, re-enter the security password to be registered. Enter the
new Security Password using the numeric keys.
6 Press [OK]. If the Security Password entered matches then the
password is changed to the new password and the SSD
Initializ. menu reappears.
If the password does not match, Incorrect password is displayed
and the New Password entry screen reappears. Enter again from
the new Security Password.
Initialization (Initialize on optional SSD)
Overwrite all the data stored in the optional SSD when disposing of the printer.
1 In the SSD Initializ. menu, press or to select
Initialization.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The printer automatically restarts and
then initialization starts.
If you do not wish to initialize, press [No] ([Right Select]). The SSD
Initializ. menu reappears.
4 When the initialization is finished Task is completed. is
displayed. Turn the power switch off and then on.
Note The Security Password must be between 6 and 16
characters. For details on entering characters, refer to
Character Entry Method on page A-2.
IMPORTANT If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, the SSD might possibly crash or
initialization might fail.
Operation Panel
4-128
DataSanitization (Sanitizing the stored data)
This is to completely delete the address information registered on the machine and the stored image data.
1 In the Data Security menu, press or to select
DataSanitization.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Sanitizing the
data. appears and the data sanitization begins.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Data Security
menu without sanitizing the data.
4 When the data sanitization is finished Complet is displayed. Press
[OK] ([Right Select]) and turn the power switch off.
IMPORTANT To complete this process requires about a few minutes when an SSD is not installed, 30 minutes when an
optional SSD (HD-6) is installed and 2 hours when an optional SSD (HD-7) is installed.
You can only performing this operation by logging in with machine administrator privileges.
It is not possible to cancel the process once it has started.
Remove the USB cable and network cable, etc., before performing this operation.
Do not turn off the power supply whilst the deletion is ongoing. If the power switch off during the deletion then the deletion
will automatically be performed when the power is switched back on, but a complete operation cannot be guaranteed.
The data deleted is as listed below.
• Job settings
• Machine settings (Network settings)
• Certificates
• User settings (user list, document boxes)
• Machine administration (job logs, job accounting)
Note It is possible to check the status of data sanitization implementation on the Status page. For details, refer to
Status Page (Printing a printer's status page) on page 4-12.
Sanitize the data.
Are you sure?
* This process will
take a while.
Yes
No
Note When an optional SSD is installed, the printer
automatically restarts before data sanitization.
Sanitizing the data.
OK
Main Memory
SSD
Complet:
Complet:
Note It is possible to check the result of data sanitization on
the Status page. For details, refer to Status Page (Printing a
printer's status page) on page 4-12.
4-129
Operation Panel
User/Job Account (User Login Setting/Job Account setting)
It is possible to set User Login Administration and Job Accounting on this machine.
User/ Job Account has the following items.
• User Login Set. (User login setting)...4-129
• Job Account.Set. (Job Account setting)...4-140
• Unknown ID Job (Operation settings for unknown IDs)...4-148
User Login Set. (User login setting)
User Login Administration is a function which makes it possible to specify the users who can use the machine and to
manage the users. If the login user name and password entered match those already registered then the user is
authenticated and can log in to the machine.
Users are classified into "User", "Administrator" or "DeviceAdmin", depending on their authority. The setting of security
levels can only be done by DeviceAdmin.
The authentication for this machine uses a network authentication server. The registration of users is done on the server.
In the local user list for the machine, 1 user with administrator authority and 1 user with device administrator authority are
registered. To change the administrator information, refer to
Administrator on page 4-136.
When the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated, it is possible to log in using an ID card.
First User Login Administration
Follow these steps for the first user login administration.
Enable user login administration. (page 4-131)
▼
Add a user on the network server.
▼
Log out. (page 4-136)
▼
The registered user logs in for operations. (page 4-135)
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select User/Job Account.
3 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
4 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the User/Job Account menu screen
is displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Operation Panel
4-130
5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
6 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
7 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
9 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the User/Job Account menu
screen appears.
10
Press or to select User Login Set..
11
Press [OK]. The User Login Set. menu appears.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
Login Password:
Text
ABC
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
User/Job Account:
Unknown ID Job
Exit
03
Job Account.Set.
02
01
User Login Set.
User Login Set.:
Exit
Local User List
02
01
User Login
4-131
Operation Panel
User Login
This enables user login administration. This switches the User Login Administration On/Off and sets the authentication
network server.
1 In the User Login Set. menu, press or to select User
Login.
2 Press [OK]. The User Login menu screen appears.
Login Type (Enabling of User Login Administration)
Select Netwk Authentic. to enable User Login Administration.
1 In the User Login menu, press or to select Login Type.
2 Press [OK]. The Login Type screen appears.
3 Press or to select Netwk Authentic. or Off.
4 Press [OK]. The User Login menu reappears.
Netwk Auth. Set (Netwk authentication setting)
Set the network authentication server.
1 In the User Login menu, press or to select Netwk Auth.
Set.
2 Press [OK]. The Netwk Auth. Set menu screen appears.
The options available in Netwk Auth. Set are as follows:
• Server Type (Server type selection)...4-132
• Host Name (Entering of Host Name)...4-132
• Port (Port number setting)...4-132
• Domain Name (Selecting of Domain Name)...4-133
Note When Netwk Authentic. is selected, set the
network authentication server.
Note These settings are only displayed when Netwk Authentic. has been set as the Login Type (Enabling of
User Login Administration) on page 4-131.
Operation Panel
4-132
Server Type (Server type selection)
Select the type of server for the authentication server.
1 In the Netwk Auth. Set menu, press or to select Server
Type.
2 Press [OK]. The Server Type screen appears.
The available server types are as follows:
NTLM
Kerberos
Ext.
3 Press or to select the desired server type.
4 Press [OK]. The server type is set and the Netwk Auth. Set menu
reappears.
Host Name (Entering of Host Name)
Enter the host name for the authentication server.
1 In the Netwk Auth. Set menu, press or to select Host Name.
2 Press [OK]. The Host Name screen appears.
3 Enter the host name using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. The Domain screen appears.
5 Referring to Domain Name (Selecting of Domain Name) on page 4-
133, select the domain name for the authentication server.
6 Press [OK]. The host name is registered and the Netwk Auth. Set
menu reappears.
Port (Port number setting)
Set the Port number for the authentication server.
1 In the Netwk Auth. Set menu, press or to select Port.
2 Press [OK]. The Port screen appears.
Server Type:
NTLM
01
Kerberos
02
*
Ext.
03
Note Select Ext. to perform ID Card Authentication.
Host Name:
Text
ABC
Note Up to 64 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Domain:
----------------
Menu
03
Domain 02
02
01
Domain 01*
Note This setting is only displayed when Ext. has been set as the Server Type (Server type selection) on page 4-
132.
Port:
9093
4-133
Operation Panel
3 Enter the port number using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. The port number is registered and the Netwk Auth.
Set menu reappears.
Domain Name (Selecting of Domain Name)
Enter the domain name for the authentication server.
1 In the Netwk Auth. Set menu, press or to select Domain
Name.
2 Press [OK]. The Domain screen appears.
3 Press or to select the domain name for the authentication
server, and press [OK]. The domain is registered and the Netwk
Auth. Set menu reappears.
If the domain has not been set, select the number where --------
-------- is displayed and press [Menu] ([Right Select]).
4 Press or to select Edit.
5 Press [OK]. The Domain screen appears.
6 Enter the domain name using the numeric keys.
7 Press [OK]. The Domain menu reappears.
8 Check if the entered domain name is selected, press [OK]. The
domain name is registered and the Netwk Auth. Set menu
reappears.
NW User Property (Obtain the network user property)
This setting is to acquire user information from the LDAP server.
1 In the User Login Set. menu, press or to select NW User
Property.
Note If the port number is registered as a blank field, the
default port number will be enabled.
Note This setting is only displayed when NTLM or Kerberos has been set as the Server Type (Server type
selection) on page 4-132.
Note Up to 256 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Note This setting is only displayed when Netwk Authentic. has been set as the Login Type (Enabling of User
Login Administration) on page 4-131 and NTLM or Kerberos has been set as the Server Type (Server type
selection) on page 4-132.
Operation Panel
4-134
2 Press [OK]. The NW User Property menu screen appears.
The options available in NW User Property are as follows:
• Off/On (Switching network user property acquisition On/Off)...4-
134
• Authenticat Type (Authenticat type setting)...4-134
Off/On (Switching network user property acquisition On/Off)
Set the NW User Property to On/Off.
1 In the NW User Property menu, press or to select Off/On.
2 Press [OK]. The Off/On screen appears.
3 Press or to select On or Off.
4 Press [OK]. The NW User Property menu reappears.
Authenticat Type (Authenticat type setting)
Set the authentication method.
1 In the NW User Property menu, press or to select
Authenticat Type.
2 Press [OK]. The Authenticat Type screen appears.
3 Press or to select Simple or SASL.
4 Press [OK]. The NW User Property menu reappears.
PIN Login
This sets whether or not to login using PIN. When set to On, you can login by entering PIN on the login screen.
1 In the User Login Set. menu, press or to select PIN Login.
2 Press [OK]. The PIN Login screen appears.
3 Press or to select On or Off.
4 Press [OK]. The User Login Set. menu reappears.
NW User Property:
Off/On
Exit
Authenticat Type
01
02
Note Authenticat Type is only displayed when
Kerberos has been set as the Server Type (Server type
selection) on page 4-132.
Off/On:
Off
01
On
02
*
Authenticat Type:
Simple
01
SASL
02
*
Note This setting is only displayed when Netwk Authentic. has been set as the Login Type (Enabling of User
Login Administration) on page 4-131 and This setting is only displayed when Ext. has been set as the Server Type
(Server type selection) on page 4-132.
Pin Login:
Off
01
On
02
*
4-135
Operation Panel
Login/Logout
Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this
machine. Enter the user information registered on the network authentication server as the login user name and password.
Register new users from the aQrate. For details, refer to the aQrate Install Manual.
Login
Use the procedure below to login.
1 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
2 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
3 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
4 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
5 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
6 Check that the correct login user name and password have been
entered then press [Login] ([Right Select]).
Note To carry out operations restricted in the mode selection menu operation and Lock Operation Panel settings,
it is necessary to log in as a user with administrator authority.
For the administrator settings, refer to
Administrator on page 4-136.
For Lock Operation Panel, refer to Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Note For details on entering characters, refer to Character
Entry Method on page A-2.
Note For details on entering characters, refer to Character
Entry Method on page A-2.
Note When Job Accounting is set, it is possible to press
[Menu] ([Left Select]) then select Counter on the menu
displayed and press [OK] to see the number of pages
printed.
Operation Panel
4-136
Logout
When the operations are finished, press [Logout]. The login screen
reappears.
Auto Logout
Logout is automatically executed in the following cases:
• When the power supply is off
• When the machine enters the sleep mode after the setting time of
Auto Sleep has passed
• When the power of the machine turns off after the setting time of auto
power off has passed
• When the settings are restored to the default after the setting time of
Auto Panel Reset has passed
Administrator
In the local user list for the machine, 1 user with administrator authority and 1 user with device administrator authority are
registered.
Each user's properties are:
Changing the administrator information
It is possible to change the administrator information. Use the procedure below to change the details registered.
1 In the User Login Set. menu, press or to select Local
User List.
2 Press [OK]. The Local User List screen appears.
3 Press or to select the administrator to change.
Machine Administrator Administrator
User Name: DeviceAdmin User Name: Admin
Login User Name: P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
Login Password: Admin
Access Level: Machine Administrator Access Level: Administrator
Note Log in as DeviceAdmin to change the administrator information. When logged in as Admin., it is only possible
to check the administrator information.
Local User List:
Admin
DeviceAdmin
4-137
Operation Panel
4 Press [OK]. The detailed information for the user is displayed.
To change the Login User Name
5 Press or to select Login User Name.
6 Pressing [Edit] ([Right Select]). The screen for editing the Login
User Name appears.
7 Change the Login User Name using the numeric keys and press
[OK]. The Login User Name screen reappears.
To change the Login Password
8 Press or to select Login Password.
9 Pressing [Edit] ([Right Select]). The New Password screen
appears.
10
Enter the new password using the numeric keys and press [OK]. The
Confirm Password screen reappears.
11
To confirm, re-enter the password to be registered. Enter the
Password using the numeric keys.
12
Press [OK]. If the Password matches then the password is changed
to the new one and the Login Password screen reappears.
If the password does not match, Incorrect password is displayed
and the New Password screen reappears. Enter again from the new
Password.
Note Up to 32 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Note Up to 64 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Operation Panel
4-138
To change the E-mail Address
13
Press or to select E-mailAddress.
14
Pressing [Edit] ([Right Select]). The Address Entry screen
appears.
15
Change the address using the numeric keys and press [OK]. The E-
mailAddress screen reappears.
To change the Account ID
16
Press or to select Account ID.
17
Pressing [Change] ([Right Select]). The Account ID screen
appears.
18
Press or to select the Account ID and press [OK]. The Account
ID screen reappears.
ID Card Settings
This sets the login method when the optional Card Authentication Kit is used and users are managed using ID cards.
1 In the User Login Set. menu, press or to select ID Card
Settings.
2 Press [OK]. The ID Card Settings menu screen appears.
The options available in ID Card Settings are as follows:
• Key Login (Setting for key login permission)...4-139
• Additional Auth. (Setting for additional authentication)...4-139
Detail:
4/ 5E-mailAddress:
Edit
Address Entry:
Text
ABC
Note Up to 128 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Note This item is only displayed when Job Account is set.
Detail:
5/ 5Account ID:
Change
00000001
Account ID:
11111111
22222222
33333333
Note For other accounts, select Others.
Note This item is only displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated. For details of the Card
Authentication Kit, refer to Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide for Printer.
ID Card Settings:
Key Login
Exit
Password Login
01
02
4-139
Operation Panel
Key Login (Setting for key login permission)
This setting also permits logging in using the numeric keys on the ID card login screen. When Permit is set, KeyLogin is
displayed on the login screen and it is possible to log in by entering the Login User Name and Login Password using the
numeric keys. When Prohibit is set, it is not possible to log in using the numeric keys.
1 In the ID Card Settings menu, press or to select Key
Login.
2 Press [OK]. The Key Login screen appears.
3 Press or to select Permit or Prohibit.
4 Press [OK]. The ID Card Settings menu reappears.
Additional Auth. (Setting for additional authentication)
This sets whether or not to require the entry of a Login Password or PIN (Personal Identification Number) after
authentication using an ID card. When set to On, the Login Password or PIN entry screen is displayed after the ID card is
authenticated.
1 In the ID Card Settings menu, press or to select
Additional Auth..
2 Press [OK]. The Additional Auth. screen appears.
3 Press or to select Off, Use Password or Use PIN.
4 Press [OK]. The ID Card Settings menu reappears.
Note This setting is only displayed when Ext. has been set as the Server Type (Server type selection) on page 4-
132.
When Use PIN is selected in this setting, even if the PIN Login is set to Off, you can enter PIN for additional
authentication.
Operation Panel
4-140
Job Account.Set. (Job Account setting)
Job Accounting is a function that allows the number of pages used by each department to be managed through the use of
entered account IDs. To specify the Job Accounting settings, it is necessary to log in with an administrator's Login User
Name and Login Password. For details of User Login Administration, refer to User Login Set. (User login setting) on page
4-129.
Job accounting on this machine offers the following features:
• Support for up to 100 departments
• Account IDs up to 8 digits long from 1 to 99999999
• Collective print management for the same account ID
• Totaling of the number of pages used for each department
• Specifiable limits (1 to 9,999,999) on the number of pages used
The options available in the Job Account.Set menu are as follows:
• Job Accounting (Enabling Job Accounting)...4-141
• AccountingAccess (Setting the job accounting access)...4-142
• Account.(Local) (Job Accounting settings)...4-142
• Apply Limit (Operation settings when limits are exceeded)...4-147
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select User/Job Account.
3 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
4 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
6 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the User/Job Account menu screen
is displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Login User Name:
Text
ABC
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
4-141
Operation Panel
7 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
9 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the User/Job Account menu
screen appears.
10
Press or to select Job Account.Set..
11
Press [OK]. The Job Account.Set. menu appears.
Job Accounting (Enabling Job Accounting)
Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below.
1 In the Job Account.Set. menu, press or to select Job
Accounting.
2 Press [OK]. The Job Accounting screen appears.
3 Press or to select On or Off and then press [OK]. The Job
Account.Set. menu reappears.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-142
AccountingAccess (Setting the job accounting access)
Set the job accounting access.
1 In the Job Account.Set. menu, press or to select
AccountingAccess.
2 Press [OK]. The AccountingAccess screen appears.
3 Press or to select Local or Network, and press [OK]. The Job
Account.Set. menu reappears.
Account.(Local) (Job Accounting settings)
You can add, change and delete an account, set the restriction for each account, and count the number of pages printed.
The options available in the [Account.(Local)] menu are as follows:
• Account. Report (Account report printing)...4-142
• Each Job Account (Totals display by account)...4-143
• Account. List (Account List operation)...4-144
1 In the Job Account.Set. menu, press or to select
Account.(Local).
2 Press [OK]. The Account.(Local) screen appears.
Account. Report (Account report printing)
This enables you to print the total number of pages for all accounts as a Job Accounting list.
1 In the Account.(Local) menu, press or to select Account.
Report.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). Accepted. appears and the printer
prints the job accounting list.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Account.(Local)
menu without printing the job accounting list.
AccountingAccess:
Local
01
Network
02
*
Note To select Network, network authentication must be
enabled and the server type must be set. For details, refer to
Netwk Auth. Set (Netwk authentication setting) on page 4-
131.
Account.(Local):
Account. List
Exit
03
Each Job Account
02
01
Account. Report
Print.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Account. Report
4-143
Operation Panel
Each Job Account (Totals display by account)
Displays the number of pages printed for each of the currently selected accounts.
This enables you to check the following numbers for printed pages:
• Total
• Combine (None)
• Combine (2in1)
• Combine (4in1)
• Duplex (1side)
• Duplex (2side)
1 In the Account.(Local) menu, press or to select Each Job
Account.
2 Press [OK]. The Each Job Account menu appears with the
accounts with the highest numbers listed first.
3 Press or to select an account and then press [OK]. The
Printed Pages/Counter Reset menu screen appears.
4 Press or to select Printed Pages.
5 Press [OK]. The Printed Pages menu list screen appears.
6 Press or to check the required counter display.
7 Press [OK]. The Printed Pages/Counter Reset menu screen
reappears.
Each Job Account Counter Reset (Totals reset by account)
Resets the number of pages printed for each of the accounts currently set.
1 In the Account.(Local) menu, press or to select Each Job
Account.
2 Press [OK]. The Each Job Account menu appears with the
accounts with the highest numbers listed first.
Note Before carrying out this operation, register the Account in the Account. List (Account List operation) on page
4-144.
Note Before carrying out this operation, register the Account in the Account. List (Account List operation) on page
4-144.
Operation Panel
4-144
3 Press or to select an account and then press [OK]. The
Printed Pages/Counter Reset menu screen appears.
4 Press or to select Counter Reset.
5 Press [OK]. The reset confirmation menu screen appears.
To proceed with resetting the counter, press [Yes] ([Left Select]).
Completed. appears, the counter is reset and the Printed
Pages/Counter Reset menu reappears.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Printed Pages/
Counter Reset menu screen without resetting the counter.
Account. List (Account List operation)
This specifies the setting for the department to be used for setting Job Accounting.
Add (Account registration)
Use this procedure to add a new account.
1 In the Account.(Local) menu, press or to select Account.
List.
2 Press [OK]. The Account. List menu appears showing a list of
the registered accounts in ascending order.
3 Press [Add] ([Right Select]). The Account ID menu screen
appears.
4 Use the numeric keys to enter the account ID to be added.
5 Press [OK]. Once the account has been added, a list of selection
options appears.
This message appears if the account ID has already been registered.
00000001:
Printed Pages
Counter Reset
01
02
Reset counter.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
00000001
Note Because account IDs are managed as numeric strings, "1" and "001" are handled as different accounts.
Also, once Job Accounting is enabled, no jobs are printed unless information is attached showing the accounts from
which the jobs are being printed.
Account. List:
00000003
Add
00000002
00000001
Account ID:
00000004:
Detail/Edit
Delete
01
02
Exit
03
This account ID is
already registered.
4-145
Operation Panel
Detail/Edit (Checking/editing registered account ID settings)
This procedure allows you to check or edit registered accounts.
1 In the Account.(Local) menu, press or to select Account.
List.
2 Press [OK]. The Account. List menu appears showing a list of
the registered accounts in ascending order.
3 Press or to select an account to check or edit and then press
[OK]. A list of selection options appears.
4 Press or to select Detail/Edit and then press [OK]. The
Detail/Edit menu screen appears.
5 To edit an account ID, press or to select Account ID and then
press [OK]. The Account ID menu screen appears.
6 Use the numeric keys to enter the new account ID.
7 Press [OK]. When account ID editing has been completed, the
Detail/Edit menu screen appears.
This message appears if the account ID has already been registered.
8 To place printing restrictions on this account, press or to select
Print Restrict. and then press [OK].
The Print Restrict. screen appears.
• Off
• Counter Limit
• Reject Usage
9 Press or to select a setting and then press [OK]. When the
setting has been completed, the Detail/Edit menu screen
appears.
Operation Panel
4-146
10
When Counter Limit is set for Print Restrict. in step 9, set
the limit on the total number of pages that can be printed using this
account. Press or to select Counter Limit and then press
[OK]. The Counter Limit menu screen appears.
IMPORTANT Counter Limit is displayed when Counter
Limit
is set for Print Restrict..
11
Use the numeric keys or or to enter the limit you want to set for
this account. After you have entered the limit on the number of pages,
press [OK]. The setting is stored and the Detail/Edit menu
reappears.
Delete (Deleting registered accounts)
You can use this procedure to delete a registered account ID.
1 In the Account.(Local) menu, press or to select Account.
List.
2 Press [OK]. The Account. List menu appears showing a list of
the registered accounts in ascending order.
3 Press or to select the ID of the account to be deleted.
4 Press [OK]. A list of selection options appears.
5 Press or to select Delete and then press [OK]. A confirmation
screen appears.
6 To proceed with deleting the account, press [Yes] ([Left Select]).
Completed. appears and the account is deleted. The once deleting
of the account ends, the Account. List screen reappears.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the list of selections
options without deleting the account.
Counter Limit:
9999999
(1 - 9999999)
pages
Detail/Edit:
Account ID
01
Print Restrict.
02
Counter Limit
03
Account. List:
00000003
Add
00000002
00000001
00000001:
Detail/Edit
Delete
01
02
Exit
03
Delete.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
00000001
Account. List:
Add
00000003
00000002
4-147
Operation Panel
Apply Limit (Operation settings when limits are exceeded)
Use this to specify the action taken when a department exceeds its printing limits.
1 In the Job Account.Set. menu, press or to select Apply
Limit.
2 Press [OK]. The Apply Limit screen appears.
• Immediately (prohibit printing from this job onwards)
• Subsequently (prohibit printing from the next job onwards)
3 Press or to select a setting and then press [OK]. The Job
Account.Set. menu list reappears.
Operation Panel
4-148
Unknown ID Job (Operation settings for unknown IDs)
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User Login
is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select User/Job Account.
3 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
4 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
6 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
7 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the User/Job Account menu screen
is displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Login User Name:
Text
ABC
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
6000
Login Password:
Text
ABC
4-149
Operation Panel
8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
9 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the User/Job Account menu
screen appears.
10
Press or to select Unknown ID Job.
11
Press [OK]. The Unknown ID Job screen appears.
• Reject (Not printed)
• Permit (Printed)
12
Press or to select a setting and then press [OK]. The User/Job
Account menu list reappears.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN: 5500
P-6031DN: 6000
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Operation Panel
4-150
Adjust/Maint. (Adjust/Maintenance selection/setting)
Adjust/Maintenance is used to adjust the print quality and to carry out printer maintenance.
The options available in Adjust/Maintenance are as follows:
• Quiet Mode (Setting the Quiet Mode)...4-150
• Restart (Restart Printer)...4-151
• Service Setting (for Maintenance)...4-152
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Adjust/Maint..
3 Press [OK]. The Adjust/Maint. menu appears showing a list of
available options.
Quiet Mode (Setting the Quiet Mode)
Lower print speed for quiet processing.
Options available in Quiet Mode are as follows:
• Quiet Mode (Selecting the Quiet Mode)...4-150
• Each Job (Permission for settings for each jobs)...4-151
1 In the Adjust/Maint. menu screen, press or to select Quiet
Mode.
2 Press [OK]. The Quiet Mode menu appears showing a list of
available options.
Quiet Mode (Selecting the Quiet Mode)
Set the Quiet Mode. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.
1 In the Quiet Mode menu screen, press or to select Quiet
Mode.
2 Press [OK]. The [Quiet Mode] menu appears.
3 Press or to select Off or On.
4 Press [OK]. The Quiet Mode is set and the Quiet Mode menu
screen reappears.
IMPORTANT Service Setting is primarily a menu used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is no
need for customers to use this menu.
Adjust/Maint.:
Service Setting
Exit
03
Restart
02
01
Quiet Mode
Quiet Mode:
Quiet Mode
Exit
Each Job
01
02
Note The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode.
Quiet Mode:
Off
01
On
02
*
4-151
Operation Panel
Each Job (Permission for settings for each jobs)
It is possible to set the use of Quiet Mode for each job. Set whether or not to permit the setting for each job.
1 In the Quiet Mode menu screen, press or to select Each Job.
2 Press [OK]. The Each Job menu appears.
3 Press or to select Permit or Prohibit.
4 Press [OK]. The selected mode is set and the Quiet Mode menu
screen reappears.
Restart (Restart Printer)
The procedure described below resets the printer’s temporary conditions, such as the current page orientation, font, etc.,
set by commands to their default values. Downloaded fonts and macros are deleted from the printer’s memory.
1 In the Adjust/Maint. menu screen, press or to select
Restart..
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The printer is restarted.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the Adjust/Maint.
menu screen without restarting the printer.
Operation Panel
4-152
Service Setting (for Maintenance)
IMPORTANT Service Setting is primarily a menu used by service personnel for maintenance work.
Item Description Value
Service Status
The service status page contains printer settings information that is more detailed than
the standard status page and is therefore mostly for service purposes. However, there
is a great deal of information on the service status page that may be useful to you.
Yes, No
Network Status The network status page contains detailed information on the network settings.
This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel, but it contains
information that may also be useful to you.
Yes, No
Op Netwk Status The option network status page contains detailed information on the network
settings. This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel, but it
contains information that may also be useful to you.
Note
The
Op Netwk Status
menu is only displayed when the optional
Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
Yes, No
Test Page The test page is printed to check the effectiveness of printer adjustments. This is
primarily used for maintenance by service personnel, but it contains information
that may also be useful to you.
Yes, No
Maintenance This specifies the setting for confirmation of replacement with the new
Maintenance Kit (resets the total number of Maintenance Kit print images). This
is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel.
Note The Maintenance menu is displayed only when Replace MK. appears.
Yes, No
Drum This sets the refresh mode for the drum. When the printing quality declines,
refreshing the drum can restore the printing quality. This is primarily used for
maintenance by service personnel.
Note Drum2 does not appear with P-4531DN.
Yes, No
Drum2
New Developer This specifies the setting for confirmation of replacement with the new
Developer (resets the total number of Developer print images). This is primarily
used for maintenance by service personnel.
Yes, No
Auto DrumRefresh An automatic drum refresh is sometimes carried out when the power supply is
switched on or when the machine recovers from sleep mode. In order to
maintain the image quality, the automatic drum refresh is implemented
automatically after observing the surrounding temperature and humidity.
Here, the time for carrying out the automatic drum refresh is set.
Normally set it to Standard. If Off or Short is selected, the best image quality
may not be kept.
Off, Short,
Standard, Long
Drum Heater This sets the On/Off of the drum heater integrated in the machine.
When Drum Heater is set to On, the drum heater continues to start, but the drum
refresh is not carried out.
When the machine is installed in a high humidity environment, the start up time
can be shortened.
Note This setting does not appear in some regions.
Off, On
Write Data This writes data to USB memory.
Note This menu only appears when a USB memory device is inserted.
Yes, No
4-153
Operation Panel
Altitude Adj. This sets the altitude adjustment mode. If you are using the machine at high
altitude and print quality has deteriorated, you can use Altitude Adjustment
mode to restore print quality.
Normal, 1001 -
2000m, 2001 -
3000m, 3001 -
3500m
MC This sets the output of the main charger. When print quality has deteriorated, the
output of the main charger can be changed to restore print quality.
1 - 7
Item Description Value
Operation Panel
4-154
Op Functions (Optional application settings)
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Application
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
• DATA SECURITY (Data Security Kit(E))
• ID Card (Card Authentication Kit(B))
• UG-33 (ThinPrint)
There are also some applications that can be used for a limited trial period.
The options available in Op Functions menu are as follows:
• Starting Application Use...4-154
• Checking Application Details...4-156
Starting Application Use
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1 Press [Menu].
2 Press or to select Op Functions.
3 Press [OK]. The Login screen appears.
4 With the Login User Name entry field selected, press [OK]. The
Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The log in screen reappears.
Note Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending
on the application.
Login User Name:
Login
Login Password:
Note When user login administration is set:
• When logged in as an administrator, the log in screen is
not displayed and the Op Functions menu screen is
displayed.
• The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other
than an administrator. Log in again as an administrator.
Login User Name:
Text
ABC
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login User
Name is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN 5500
P-6031DN: 6000.
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
4-155
Operation Panel
6 Press or to select the Login Password entry field.
7 Press [OK]. The Login Password entry screen is displayed.
8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press [OK].
The login screen reappears.
9 Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]). If the entered Login User Name
and Login Password are correct, the Op Functions menu appears.
10
Press or to select the desired application.
11
Press [OK].
12
Press or to select License On.
13
Press [OK].
14
Press or to select Official.
Note The initial setting for the administrator's Login
Password is set as shown below.
P-4531DN: 4500
P-5031DN: 5000
P-5531DN 5500
P-6031DN: 6000.
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Note You can view detailed information on the selected
application by selecting Detail.
Note There are also some applications that can be used for
a limited trial period. To use the application as a trial, select
Trial and press [OK]. The confirmation screen is displayed
so press [Yes] ([Left Select]).
Operation Panel
4-156
15
Press [OK].
16
Use the numeric keys or press or to enter the license key.
Use and to move the position being entered, which is shown
highlighted.
17
Press [OK].
18
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes] ([Left Select]).
IMPORTANT If you change the date/time while using an application,
you will no longer be able to use the application.
Checking Application Details
Use the procedure below to check the details of an application.
1 In the Op Functions menu, press or to select the application
to check the details of.
2 Press [OK].
3 Press or to select Detail.
4 Press [OK]. You can now view detailed information on the selected
application.
License Key:
0000
(0000 - 9999)
0000--
Note Some applications do not require you to enter a
license key.
License Key:
1234
(0000 - 9999)
5678--
Note If a message prompting a restart is displayed after
changes have been made then obey the message and switch
the machine OFF and ON again.
DATA SECURITY:
License On
01
Detail
02
Detail:
1/ 3Function Name:
Detail
DATA SECURITY
5-1
5 Document Box
This chapter contains explanations on the following topics:
Document Box........................................................................................................................................ 5-2
Custom Box............................................................................................................................................5-3
Job Box.................................................................................................................................................5-21
Computer Settings (Printer Driver) ....................................................................................................5-30
Document Box
5-2
Document Box
The Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer onto the memory on the machine and then printing
it by operating the operation panel.
Press [Document Box] to display the Document Box menu.
Document Box has the following functions.
• Custom Box...5-3
• Job Box...5-21
Outline of Custom Box and Job Box
The outline of Custom Box and Job Box and the options required are as follows:
Custom Box Job Box
Primary function This is a general-purpose box.
Print data can be stored to the
Custom Box and then re-used
whenever necessary.
Job Box is a print function that makes the Job Retention
function possible.
Job Retention has four modes as summarized below.
Quick Copy: To later print additional copies
Proof-and-Hold: To proof the first copy before printing
multiple copies
Private Print: To hold the document in printer to prevent
unauthorized access
Stored Job: To electronically store documents such as
fax cover pages
Start storing by Printer driver Printer driver
Adding more boxes Yes (to a maximum of 1,000
boxes)
No
Password setting Yes Yes (possible in Private Print and Stored Job)
Data after printing Stored Stored except Private Print
Support for User Login
Administration
Yes (The users can be set
separately for each Box)
No
SSD installation Available Available
RAM disk use Not available Available (Only Proof-and-Hold and Private Print can be
used)
Note For information on the optional SSD, refer to About the Options on page A-5.
For information on the RAM disk, refer to RAM Disk Setting (Using the RAM disk) on page 4-100.
For the formatting of the SSD, refer to Format SSD (Formatting the SSD) on page 4-101.
5-3
Document Box
Custom Box
The Custom Box is a general-purpose box which allows the user to save print data on the printer's SSD and then re-use it
whenever necessary.
The transmission of data to save in the box is done with the printer driver. For more information, refer to the Printing System
Driver User Guide.
Use the printer's operation panel to print the print data stored in a Custom Box.
Procedure for printing using Custom Box
Follow the work flow below when using Custom Box.
Registering the Custom Box (page 5-4)
▼
Specifying the Custom Box from a computer and sending the print job (page 5-30)
▼
Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it (page 5-13)
Operation panel display
1 Press [Document Box]. Either the Custom Box list screen or the
Job Box menu screen is displayed.
The options available in Custom Box are as follows:
• Custom Box operation (Box creation, editing and deletion)...5-4
• File operations (Printing, deleting and moving files)...5-13
IMPORTANT To use a Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the printer.
The SSD must be formatted from the printer. For more information, refer to Format SSD (Formatting the SSD) on
page 4-101.
Note The creation and setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from Embedded Web Server RX.
Note After pressing [Document Box], it is possible to dis-
play either the Custom Box list screen or the Job Box
menu screen or to set them. Refer to Def. Screen(Box)
(Document Box default screen setting) on page 4-94.
If the Job Box menu screen is displayed, follow the
procedure below to display the Custom Box list screen.
1 Press [Back].
2 Press or to select Custom Box.
3 Press [OK]. The Custom Box list screen appears.
Document Box
5-4
Custom Box operation (Box creation, editing and deletion)
It is possible to create Custom Boxes and change Box settings.
The following operations are possible:
• Custom Box creation...5-4
• Editing and Deleting Custom Boxes...5-10
• Sorting the Custom Box list...5-11
• Searching Custom Boxes...5-11
• Setting automatic document deletion for Custom Boxes...5-12
Custom Box creation
Create a Custom Box. Enter the Box Name and Box Number then it is possible to continue on and set the details of the Box.
1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Add] ([Right Select]). The
Box Name Entry screen appears.
2 Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys.
3 Press [OK]. The Box Number Entry screen appears.
4 Use the numeric keys or press or to enter the Box Number.
5 Press [OK].
6 Press or to select Detail or Exit then press [OK].
To set the details of the Box, select Detail and proceed to Detailed
box settings on page 5-5.
If the details of the Box will not be set then select Exit and finish the
operation.
Note The creation and setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from Embedded Web Server RX. For more
information, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User Guide.
Note When user login administration is enabled, log in as a user with administrator authority.
Box Name Entry:
Text
ABC
Note Up to 32 characters can be entered.
For details on entering characters, refer to Character Entry
Method on page A-2.
Box Number Entry:
0001
(0001 - 1000)
Note Enter the Box Number as a four-digit number from 0001 -
1000.
Box 01:
Exit
01
Detail
02
5-5
Document Box
Detailed box settings
Set the details of the Box when necessary. The items to set are different between when user login administration is not
enabled, when user login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with administrator authority and when user
login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with user authority.
The detailed settings for the Box are as shown below.
Yes: The setting can be changed.
No: The setting cannot be changed.
–: No setting
Box Name (Change the Box name)
Change the Box name.
1 In the Detail menu screen, press or to select Box Name.
2 Press [Edit] ([Right Select]). The Box Name Entry screen
appears.
Setting User login Off
User login On
Reference Page
Administrator User
Box Name Yes Yes Yes Box Name (Change the Box name)...5-5
Owner – Yes No Owner (Owner settings)...5-6
Permission – Yes Yes Permission (settings for the sharing of a
Box)...5-6
Box Password Yes Yes Yes Box Password (Box password setting)...5-7
Box Number Yes Yes Yes Box number (Change of the Box number)...5-
7
Usage Restrict. Yes Yes No Usage Restrict. (Setting for maximum
possible capacity usage)...5-8
Auto File Del. Yes Yes Yes Auto File Del. (Setting for automatic file
deletion)...5-8
Overwrite Set. Yes Yes Yes Overwrite Set. (Setting of overwrite
storage)...5-9
Del. afterPrint Yes Yes Yes Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after
printing)...5-9
Document Box
5-6
3 Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Owner (Owner settings)
When user login administration is enabled, set the owner of the Box. If the owner is not set then the owner name is displayed
as -----.
1 In the Detail menu screen, press or to select Owner.
2 Press [Change] ([Right Select]). The User setting screen
appears.
3 Press or to select Network User.
4 Press [OK]. The Login User Name screen appears.
5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys.
6 Press [OK]. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Permission (settings for the sharing of a Box)
When user login administration is enabled, this setting determines whether or not a Box will be shared with other users. This
setting is possible when Network user has been selected as the Owner (Owner settings) on page 5-6.
1 In the Detail menu screen, press or to select Permission.
Note Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2 for details on
entering characters.
Detail:
2/ 9Owner:
Change
User 01
User setting:
Network user
01
None
02
Note If the owner will not be set then select None and press
[OK].
Login User Name:
Text
ABC
Domain
Note Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2 for details on
entering characters.
If the domain has been registered, [Domain] ([Left Select])
appears. Press [Domain] ([Left Select]), and press or
to select the domain name.
Detail:
3/ 9Permission:
Change
Shared
5-7
Document Box
2 Press [Change] ([Right Select]). The Permission screen
appears.
3 Press or to select Shared or Private.
4 Press [OK]. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Box Password (Box password setting)
It is possible to set a password for a box and restrict the users who have access to it. Enter one if necessary.
1 In the Detail menu screen, press or to select Box Password.
2 Press [Edit] ([Right Select]). The New Password entry screen
appears.
3 Enter the new password using the numeric keys.
4 Press [OK]. The Confirm Password entry screen appears.
5 To confirm, re-enter the password to be registered. Enter the
password using the numeric keys.
6 Press [OK]. If the password is correct, the setting is changed to the
new password and the Detail menu screen reappears.
If the password is not correct, the display shows Incorrect
password. and returns to the New Password screen, so enter again
from the new password.
Box number (Change of the Box number)
Change the Box number.
1 In the Detail menu screen, press or to select Box Number.
Note This setting is not displayed when user login administration is enabled and the Permission (settings for the
sharing of a Box) on page 5-6 has been set to Private.
Note Up to 16 characters can be entered. For details on
entering characters, refer to Character Entry Method on page
A-2.
Document Box
5-8
2 Press [Edit] ([Right Select]). The Box Name Entry screen
appears.
3 Use the numeric keys or press or to enter the Box Number.
4 Press [OK]. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Usage Restrict. (Setting for maximum possible capacity usage)
It is possible to restrict the capacity of Boxes. To limit the usage capacity, enter the maximum value (MB) using the numeric
keys. The limit value will vary depending on the number of user Boxes that are created, but it is possible to enter the
maximum between 1 and 30,000 (MB).
1 In the Detail menu screen, press or to select Usage
Restrict..
2 Press [Change] ([Right Select]). The Usage Restrict. screen
appears.
3 Enter the limit value using the numeric keys, or .
4 Press [OK]. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Auto File Del. (Setting for automatic file deletion)
This automatically deletes the documents that have been saved after a fixed period. Set to On for the automatic deletion
and then enter the number of days that the documents will be stored. Between 1 and 31 (days) can be entered. Set to Off
if automatic deletion will not be used.
1 In the Detail menu screen, press or to select Auto File
Del..
2 Press [Change] ([Right Select]). The Auto File Del. menu
screen appears.
3 Press or to select Off/On.
Box Number Entry:
0001
(0001 - 1000)
Note Enter the Box Number as a four-digit number from
0001 - 1000.
If the display shows This box number is already
registered., this Box Number is already in use. Register a
different Box Number.
Detail:
6/ 9Usage Restrict.:
Change
200MB
Usage Restrict.:
200
(1 - 30000)
MB
Detail:
7/ 9Auto File Del.:
Change
Off
Auto File Del.:
Off/On
01
5-9
Document Box
4 Press [OK]. The Off/On screen appears.
5 Press or to select On or Off.
6 Press [OK]. The Auto File Del. menu screen reappears.
7 Press or to select Period.
8 Press [OK]. The Period screen appears.
9 Enter the number of days for storage using the numeric keys, or .
10
Press [OK]. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Overwrite Set. (Setting of overwrite storage)
This setting is used to permit or prohibit the overwriting of old documents that have been stored for the storage of new
documents.
1 In the Detail menu screen, press or to select Overwrite
Set..
2 Press [Change] ([Right Select]). The Overwrite Set. screen
appears.
3 Press or to select Permit or Prohibit.
4 Press [OK]. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after printing)
This automatically deletes the documents from the Boxes when the printing is complete.
1 In the Detail menu screen, press or to select Del.
afterPrint.
Note If On has been selected, set the number of days for
storage as the Period. Period is only displayed if it has
been set to On.
Document Box
5-10
2 Press [Change] ([Right Select]). The Del. afterPrint screen
appears.
3 Press or to select On or Off.
4 Press [OK]. The Detail menu screen reappears.
Editing and Deleting Custom Boxes
It is possible to change the detailed settings of the Custom Boxes and to delete Boxes.
1 In the Custom Box list screen, press or to select the Box to edit
or delete.
2 Press [OK]. The file list screen for the Box selected is displayed.
The following operations are possible:
• Editing Custom Boxes...5-10
• Deleting Custom Boxes...5-11
Editing Custom Boxes
1 In the file list screen, press [Menu] ([Left Select]). The Menu screen
appears.
2 Press or to select Box Detail/Edit.
3 Press [OK]. The Detail screen appears.
4 Press or to check each of the settings and make changes.
5 When the editing is completed press [OK]. The file list screen
reappears.
Del. after Print:
Off
01
On
02
*
Custom Box:
Menu Add
0002 Box 02
0001 Box 01
0003 Box 03
0001 Box 01
Menu Select
Data 01
All Files
Data 02
Note If the screen for entering a password is displayed then
enter the password using the numeric keys and then press
[OK].
Refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2 for details on
entering characters.
Menu:
Search(Name)
01
Box Detail/Edit
02
Delete
03
Detail:
1/ 9Box Name:
Edit
Box 01
Note For the method for making changes, refer to Detailed
box settings on page 5-5.
5-11
Document Box
Deleting Custom Boxes
1 In the file list screen, press [Menu] ([Left Select]). The Menu screen
appears.
2 Press or to select Delete.
3 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
4 To proceed with deleting the custom box, press [Yes] ([Left
Select]). Completed. appears and the custom box is deleted. The
once deleting of the custom box ends, the Custom Box list screen
reappears.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the file list screen without
deleting the custom box.
Sorting the Custom Box list
When user login administration is enabled, it is possible to sort the list display into either Box Number order or Box Owner
order.
1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] ([Left Select]). The
Menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Sort.
3 Press [OK]. The Sort screen appears.
4 Press or to select Box No. or Box Owner.
5 Press [OK]. The Menu screen reappears.
Searching Custom Boxes
It is possible to search for a Custom Box using either the Box number or Box name.
1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] ([Left Select]). The
Menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Search (No.) or Search (Name).
Document Box
5-12
3 Press [OK]. The Search (No.) screen or the Search (Name)
screen appears.
Searching is possible using the methods below:
• Searching with Box numbers...5-12
• Searching with Box names...5-12
Searching with Box numbers
1 In the Search(No.), press [Menu] ([Left Select]). The Menu
screen appears.
2 Press or to select Search(No.).
3 Press [OK]. The Search(No.) screen appears.
4 Enter the Box number to be found and press [OK]. A search is done
for the Box number entered.
Searching with Box names
1 In the Search(No.), press [Menu] ([Left Select]). The Menu
screen appears.
2 Press or to select Search(Name).
3 Press [OK]. The Search(Name) screen appears.
4 Enter the Box name to be found and press [OK]. A search is done for
the Box name entered.
Setting automatic document deletion for Custom Boxes
Set the time for documents stored in Custom Boxes to be automatically deleted.
1 In the Custom Box list screen, press [Menu] ([Left Select]). The
Menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select File Del. Time.
Search(No.):
0001
(0001 - 1000)
Menu
Menu:
Search(No.)
01
Search(Name)
02
*
Search(No.):
0001
(0001 - 1000)
Menu
Menu:
Search(No.)
01
Search(Name)
02
*
Search(Name):
Box
Menu
ABC
Text
Note Refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2 for
details on entering characters.
Menu:
Sort
01
Search(No.)
02
File Del. Time
03
5-13
Document Box
3 Press [OK]. The File Del. Time screen appears.
4 Use the numeric keys or press or to enter the hours and
minutes.
Press or to increase or decrease the figures.
Use and to move the position being entered, which is shown
highlighted.
5 Press [OK]. The Menu screen reappears.
File operations (Printing, deleting and moving files)
It is possible to print files stored in a Custom Box, to delete them or to move them to a different Custom Box.
The following operations are possible:
• Box number/Box name (Select a File)...5-13
• Select/Deselect All Files...5-14
• Print a File...5-14
• Print a File (Changes to the print settings)...5-15
• Delete a File...5-19
• Moving files...5-19
• Check File Details...5-20
1 In the Custom Box list screen, press or to select a Custom Box.
2 Press [OK]. The printer displays a list of files stored in the Custom
Box.
Box number/Box name (Select a File)
To print/delete a file in the Custom Box, first select the file to be printed or deleted.
1 Press or to select the file to be printed/deleted.
2 When [Select] ([Right Select]) is pressed, the file is selected. A
checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and press [Select] ([Right Select])
again to cancel the selection.
Note If the screen for entering a password is displayed then
enter the password using the numeric keys and then press [OK].
Refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2 for details on
entering characters.
Note To select all files, follow the steps of Select/Deselect All
Files on page 5-14.
Document Box
5-14
Select/Deselect All Files
All files in the Custom Box are selected.
1 In the file list screen, press or to select All Files.
2 Press [Select] ([Right Select]).
When there is a file not checked in the Custom Box, all files will be
checkmarked.
When all files in the Custom Box are checked, all checkmarked files
are deselected.
Print a File
Print the file(s) selected in the Custom Box.
1 In the file list screen, select the item and press [OK]. The Print/
Delete menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Print.
3 Press [OK]. The Copies menu screen appears.
If you want to change the number of remaining copies to be printed,
use the numeric keys or press or to set the number of copies to
be printed.
4
Press [OK]. The message Accepted. appears and printing begins.
When On is selected in the Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion
after printing) on page 5-9, the selected file will be deleted from the
Custom Box after it is printed.
0001 Box 01
Menu Select
Data 01
All Files
Data 02
0001 Box 01
Menu Select
Data 01
All Files
Data 02
0001 Box 01
Menu Select
Data 01
All Files
Data 02
0001 Box 01
Print(ChangeSet)
Print
Delete
03
02
01
Copies:
(1 - 999,---)
copies---
Note If Job Accounting is enabled, enter the account ID in
the login screen that appears. The Copies menu screen
appears after login.
--- is displayed first, and it means it according to the set
number of copies when the data of each file is preserved. In
this setting, each set number of copies is printed.
Accepted.
5-15
Document Box
Print a File (Changes to the print settings)
To change the print settings for a file selected in a Custom Box and print it.
1 In the file list screen, select the item and press [OK]. The Print/
Delete menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Print(ChangeSet).
3 Press [OK]. The Copies menu screen appears.
If you want to change the number of remaining copies to be printed,
use the numeric keys or press or to set the number of copies to
be printed.
4 Press [OK]. The Paper Source menu screen appears.
5 Press or to select the tray containing the paper you want to use.
6 Press [OK]. The message Accepted. appears and printing begins.
When On is selected in the Del. afterPrint (Setting for file deletion after
printing) on page 5-9, the selected file will be deleted from the
Custom Box after it is printed.
Print Function Settings
When printing, the print settings can be changed.
Options available in Print Function Settings are as follows:
• Quiet Mode (Selecting the Quiet Mode)...5-16
• Duplex (Setting the duplex printing)...5-16
• EcoPrint (Selecting the EcoPrint mode)...5-17
• File Name Entry (entering a file name)...5-17
• JobFinish Notice (Settings for notification when jobs are finished)...5-18
• Del. after Print (Delete data after printing setting)...5-18
Note If Job Accounting is enabled, enter the account ID in
the login screen that appears. The Copies menu screen
appears after login.
[Function] ([Right Select]) can be pressed to change the print
settings. For details, refer to Print Function Settings on page
5-15.
Document Box
5-16
Quiet Mode (Selecting the Quiet Mode)
Lower print speed for quiet processing. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable. For details, refer to Quiet
Mode (Setting the Quiet Mode) on page 4-150.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select Quiet Mode.
3 Press [OK]. The Quiet Mode screen appears.
4 Press or to select On or Off.
5 Press [OK]. The Quiet Mode is set and the Function menu
reappears.
Duplex (Setting the duplex printing)
Set duplex printing. For details, refer to Duplex (Setting the duplex printing) on page 4-46.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select Duplex.
3 Press [OK]. The Duplex screen appears showing the list of available
duplex printing modes.
4 Press or to select the desired duplex printing mode.
The message display toggles through the following:
Off
Bind Long Edge
Bind Short Edge
Selecting Off disables duplex printing.
5 Press [OK]. The duplex printing mode is set and the Function menu
reappears.
Note The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode.
This cannot be used when Prohibit is set for Each Job (Permission for settings for each jobs) on page 4-151.
Function:
EcoPrint
03
Duplex
02
01
Quiet Mode
Quiet Mode:
Off
01
On
02
*
Function:
EcoPrint
03
Duplex
02
01
Quiet Mode
Duplex:
Off
01
Bind Long Edge
02
*
Bind Short Edge
03
5-17
Document Box
EcoPrint (Selecting the EcoPrint mode)
Set EcoPrint mode. For details, refer to EcoPrint (Selecting the EcoPrint mode) on page 4-53.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select EcoPrint.
3 Press [OK]. The EcoPrint screen appears.
4 Press or to select the EcoPrint mode.
5
Press
[OK]
. The EcoPrint mode is set and the
Function
menu reappears.
File Name Entry (entering a file name)
Enter the file name. The file name entered is displayed as the Job Name in the Job Status and Job Log.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select File Name Entry.
3 Press [OK]. The File Name Entry screen appears.
4 Enter the file name using the numeric keys.
5 Press [OK]. The Additional Info. screen appears.
6 Press or to select from the additional information that can be set
for the file name.
The following settings can be selected.
• None (No additional information is added.)
• Date (To add the date.)
• Job No. (To add the Job Number.)
• Job No. + Date (To add the Job Number and date.)
• Date + Job No. (To add the date and Job Number.)
Note Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2 for details on
entering characters.
Document Box
5-18
7 Press [OK]. Register the file name and the Function menu
reappears.
JobFinish Notice (Settings for notification when jobs are finished)
The end of a job is notified using E-mail.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
2 Press or to select JobFinish Notice.
3 Press [OK]. The JobFinish Notice screen appears.
4 Press or to select the condition for notification.
The following settings can be selected.
Off (no notification)
Finished only (notification only when job finishes)
Finished + Intrp
(Notification when job finishes or is interrupted)
5 Press [OK]. The Address Entry screen appears.
6 Enter the E-Mail address to be notified.
7 Press [OK]. Register the address and the Function menu
reappears.
Del. after Print (Delete data after printing setting)
Use this setting to specify whether or not the file data is deleted after printing.
1 In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu, press
[Function] ([Right Select]). The Function menu appears.
Note To send E-mail on this machine, set the SMTP setting to On. For details, refer to ProtocolSettings (Detailed
settings for the network protocol) on page 4-78.
A mail server must be registered. For the method for setting a server, refer to the Embedded Web Server RX User
Guide.
Function:
EcoPrint
03
Duplex
02
01
Quiet Mode
JobFinish Notice:
Off
01
Finished only
02
*
Finished + Intrp
03
Address Entry:
Text
ABC
Note Up to 128 characters can be entered.
Refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2 for details on
entering characters.
When user login administration is set, the address of the
logged in user is entered.
Function:
EcoPrint
03
Duplex
02
01
Quiet Mode
5-19
Document Box
2 Press or to select Del. after Print.
3 Press [OK]. The Del. after Print screen appears.
4 Press or to select the Del. after Print setting.
5 Press [OK]. The Del. after Print setting is set and the Function
menu reappears.
Delete a File
Delete the file(s) selected in the Custom Box.
1 In the file list screen, select the item and press [OK]. The Print/
Delete menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Delete.
3 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
4 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Completed. appears
and the selected file(s) are deleted.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the file list menu screen
without deleting the file.
Moving files
A file can be moved to a different Custom Box.
1 In the file list screen, select the item and press [OK]. The Print/
Delete menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Move.
Document Box
5-20
3 Press [OK]. The Custom Box list screen appears.
4 Press or to select the destination Box.
5 Press [OK]. The message Completed. appears and the selected
file(s) is/are moved.
Check File Details
Details for the file that is selected with the cursor will appear.
1 In the file list screen, select the file and press [Menu] ([Left Select]).
2 Press or to select File Detail.
3 Press [OK]. Details for the file that is selected with the cursor
appears.
The details for the file cover 5 pages in all. Press to view to the next
page or to return to the previous page.
In the File Name screen, if the file name is abbreviated because it
cannot be displayed on one line, press [Detail] ([Right Select]) to
change the display to three lines.
Custom Box:
0003 Box 03
0002 Box 02
0004 Box 04
Completed.
Note If the screen for entering a password is displayed then
enter the password using the numeric keys and then press
[OK].
Refer to Character Entry Method on page A-2 for details on
entering characters.
Menu:
Search(Name)
01
Box Detail/Edit
02
File Detail
03
Detail:
1/ 5File Name:
Detail
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
Detail:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU
VWXYZ.txt
5-21
Document Box
Job Box
IMPORTANT To use the Job Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the printer. The RAM disk may also be used in the
Proof-and-Hold and Private Print modes.
Job Box is a print function that makes the Job Retention function possible. The settings are specified from the printer driver.
Refer to Computer Settings (Printer Driver) on page 5-30 or the Printing System Driver User Guide.
Job Retention
Job Retention has four modes as summarized below. These modes are selected from the printer driver through the
application software:
Note When using the RAM disk to use Job Box, set the RAM disk mode to On..
Quick Copy Proof-and-Hold Private Print Stored Job
Primary function To later print
additional copies
To proof the first copy
before printing
multiple copies
To hold the document
in printer to prevent
unauthorized access
To electronically store
documents such as
fax cover pages
Start storing by Printer driver Printer driver Printer driver Printer driver
On terminating print
setting from
application software
Prints simultaneously Prints one copy
simultaneously
Does not print Does not print
Retrieved by Operation panel Operation panel Operation panel Operation panel
Default number of
copies printed at
retrieval
Same as storing
(can be changed)
One less
(can be changed)
Same as storing
(can be changed)
One
(can be changed)
Maximum number of
jobs stored
†
†
Jobs in excess will cause the earlier ones to be deleted.
300 300 Depends on the SSD
capacity (the job is
automatically deleted
after printing)
Depends on the SSD
capacity
PIN security No No Yes Yes (if necessary)
Data after printing Stored Stored Deleted Stored
Data at power off Deleted Deleted Deleted Stored
SSD Necessary Unnecessary
(RAM disk may also
be used)
Unnecessary
(RAM disk may also
be used)
Necessary
Note Refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide for the driver settings and print (save) procedures.
Document Box
5-22
Procedure for printing using Job Box
Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.
Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job (page 5-30)
▼
Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it
• Quick Copy (page 5-22)
• Proof-and-Hold (page 5-22)
• Private Print (page 5-25)
• Stored Job (page 5-25)
Operation panel display
1 Press [Document Box]. Either the Custom Box list screen or the
Job Box menu screen is displayed.
The options available in Job Box are as follows:
• Quick Copy (Using Quick Copy/Proof-and-Hold)...5-22
• Private/Stored (Printing a Private Print/Stored Job)...5-25
• Job Box Setting (Job Box Configuration)...5-28
Quick Copy is displayed if there are any jobs that were saved to the SSD in Quick Copy mode.
Quick Copy is also displayed if there are any jobs that were saved to SSD or RAM disk in Proof-and-Hold mode.
Private/Stored is only displayed if there are any jobs that were saved to the SSD or RAM disk.
Quick Copy (Using Quick Copy/Proof-and-Hold)
Quick Copy mode enables you to print the requested number of copies of a job, simultaneously storing the job on the SSD.
When additional copies are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the printer operation panel.
The default number of print jobs that can be stored on the SSD is 32. This value can be increased to up to 300. For details,
refer to Job Box Setting (Job Box Configuration) on page 5-28. When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job
will be overwritten by the new one.
When you print multiple copies, Proof-and Hold mode first prints one copy so that you can proof it before continuing to print
the remaining copies. Since you can proof the printouts before printing the remaining copies, wastage of paper can be
reduced. The printer prints one copy and, at the same time, saves the print job on the SSD or RAM disk. You can also
change the number of copies when resuming printing from the operation panel.
When the printer is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
Job Box:
Exit
01
Job Box Setting
Note After pressing [Document Box], it is possible to display
either the Custom Box list screen or the Job Box menu screen
or to set them. Refer to Def. Screen(Box) (Document Box default
screen setting) on page 4-94.
If the Custom Box list screen is displayed, follow the procedure
below to display the Job Box menu screen.
1 Press [Back].
2 Press or to select Job Box.
3 Press [OK]. The Job Box menu screen appears.
Note When a print job is stored in a Job Box for proof-and-hold, the power consumption is more than that of the
sleep mode.
Refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide for the driver settings.
5-23
Document Box
The following operations are possible:
• Printing Additional Copies using Quick Copy/Remaining Copies of a Proof-and-Hold Job...5-23
• Select/Deselect All Files...5-23
• Print a File...5-24
• Deleting a Quick Copy/Proof-and-Hold Job...5-24
• Delete a File...5-25
Printing Additional Copies using Quick Copy/Remaining Copies of a Proof-and-Hold Job
1 In the Job Box menu, press or to select Quick Copy.
2 Press [OK]. The Quick Copy screen appears listing the user names
for stored jobs.
3 Press or to select the user name you entered in the printer
driver.
4 Press [OK]. The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the
selected user name.
5 Press or to scroll to the desired job title.
When [Select] ([Right Select]) is pressed, the file is selected. A
checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and press [Select] ([Right Select])
again to cancel the selection.
Select/Deselect All Files
All files in the Job Box are selected.
1 In the file list screen, press or to select All Files.
2 Press [Select] ([Right Select]).
When all files in the Job Box are checked, all checkmarked files are
deselected.
When there is a file not checked in the Job Box, all files will be
checkmarked.
Note To select all files, follow the steps of Select/Deselect All
Files on page 5-23
Document Box
5-24
Print a File
Print the file(s) selected in the Job Box.
1 In the file list screen, select the item and press [OK]. The Print/
Delete menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Print and press [OK]. The Copies menu
screen appears.
To print 2 or more copies, use the numeric keys or press or to
set the number of copies to be printed.
3 Press [OK]. The message Accepted. appears and the printer prints
the selected job.
Deleting a Quick Copy/Proof-and-Hold Job
Jobs saved using Quick Copy and Proof-and-Hold are automatically deleted when you turn the printer off, but you can also
use this procedure to delete jobs individually.
1 In the Job Box menu, press or to select Quick Copy.
2 Press [OK]. The Quick Copy screen appears listing the user names
for stored jobs.
3 Press or to select the user name you entered in the printer
driver.
4 Press [OK]. The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the
selected user name.
5 Press or to select the name of the job to be deleted.
When [Select] ([Right Select]) is pressed, the file is selected. A
checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and press [Select] ([Right Select])
again to cancel the selection.
User 01
Delete
Print
01
02
Copies:
(1 - 999,---)
copies---
Note --- is displayed first, and it means it according to the
set number of copies when the data of each file is preserved.
In this setting, each set number of copies is printed.
Accepted.
Quick Copy:
User 01
User 02
User 03
User 01
Select
Data 01
All Files
Data 02
Note To select all files, follow the steps of Select/Deselect All
Files on page 5-23
5-25
Document Box
Delete a File
Delete the file(s) selected in the Job Box.
1 In the file list screen, select the item and press [OK]. The Print/
Delete menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Delete and press [OK]. A confirmation
message is appears.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). The message Completed. appears
and the printer deletes the selected job.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the file list screen.
Private/Stored (Printing a Private Print/Stored Job)
In private printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job from the operation panel. When sending
the job from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by
entering the access code on the operation panel ensuring confidentiality of the print job.
In the stored job mode, access codes are not mandatory, but can be set on the printer driver. Then, the access code must
be entered on the operation panel to print a stored job. Print data will be stored in the SSD or RAM disk after printing.
The following operations are possible:
• Printing a Private/Stored Job...5-25
• Print a File...5-26
• Deleting a Private/Stored Job...5-27
• Delete a File...5-27
Printing a Private/Stored Job
1 In the Job Box menu, press or to select Private/Stored.
2 Press [OK]. The Private/Stored screen appears listing the user
names for stored jobs.
3 Press or to select the user name you entered in the printer
driver.
Note When a print job is stored in a Job Box for private print, the power consumption is more than that of the sleep
mode.
Refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide for the driver settings.
Document Box
5-26
4 Press [OK]. The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the
selected user name.
5 Press or to select the name of the job to be printed.
When [Select] ([Right Select]) is pressed, the file is selected. A
checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and press [Select] ([Right Select])
again to cancel the selection.
Print a File
Print the file(s) selected in the Job Box.
1 In the file list screen, select the item and press [OK]. The Print/
Delete menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Print and press [OK]. If the selected job was
saved as a Private Print job, its ID is displayed. If the job was saved
in stored job mode, the number of direct copies is displayed.
3 Use the numeric keys to enter the access code entered in the printer
driver.
Press [OK]. If the entered access code is correct, the Copies menu
screen appears.
If the entered access code is incorrect, the ID menu screen
reappears.
4 To print 2 or more copies, use the numeric keys or press or to
set the number of copies to be printed.
After selecting the multiple copies in the printer driver, you can also
restore to "1" from the operation panel using the same method.
5 Press [OK]. The message Accepted. appears and the printer prints
the selected job.
User 01
Select
Data 01
All Files
Data 02
Note To select all files, follow the steps of Select/Deselect
All Files on page 5-23
User 01
Delete
Print
01
02
ID:
0001
Note When the access code is set to the document
selected in the check box,
Incorrect ID is displayed for
the disagreement.
Copies:
(1 - 999,---)
copies---
Note --- is displayed first, and it means it according to the
set number of copies when the data of each file is preserved.
In this setting, each set number of copies is printed.
Accepted.
5-27
Document Box
Deleting a Private/Stored Job
You can individually delete stored jobs by performing the following procedure. Jobs saved using Private Print will be
automatically deleted when you turn the power off, or after printing, but jobs saved using Stored Job will not be deleted
automatically.
1 In the Job Box menu, press or to select Private/Stored.
2 Press [OK]. The Private/Stored screen appears listing the user
names for stored jobs.
3 Press or to select the user name you entered in the printer
driver.
4 Press [OK]. The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the
selected user name.
5 Press or to select the name of the job to be deleted.
When [Select] ([Right Select]) is pressed, the file is selected. A
checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.
Select the checkmarked file and press [Select] ([Right Select])
again to cancel the selection.
Delete a File
Delete the file(s) selected in the Job Box.
1 In the file list screen, select the item and press [OK]. The Print/
Delete menu screen appears.
2 Press or to select Delete and press [OK]. The ID is
displayed.
3 Use the numeric keys to enter the access code entered in the printer
driver.
4 Press [Enter] ([Right Select]). If the entered access code is
correct, the Delete menu screen appears. If the entered access code
is incorrect, the ID menu screen reappears.
Note To select all files, follow the steps of Select/Deselect All
Files on page 5-23
Note When the access code is set to the document
selected in the check box,
ID error is displayed for the
disagreement.
Document Box
5-28
5 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). Complete. appears and the printer
deletes the selected job.
Pressing [No] ([Right Select]) returns to the file list screen.
Job Box Setting (Job Box Configuration)
Change Job Box setting, such as the maximum number of storable documents in the Document Box, and automatic delete
settings, and select the storage media.
The following items are available in the Job Box setting.
• Quick Copy Jobs (Changing the Maximum Number of Quick Copy jobs)...5-28
• JobRet. Deletion (Set Automatic Delete times for Temporary Jobs)...5-28
• Storage Media (Selecting the storage media for the jobs)...5-29
Quick Copy Jobs (Changing the Maximum Number of Quick Copy jobs)
This changes maximum number of Quick Copy jobs to a value between 0 and 300.
1 In the Job Box menu, press or to select Job Box Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The Job Box Setting screen appears.
3 Press or to select Quick Copy Jobs and press [OK]. The
Quick Copy Jobs screen appears.
4 Use the numeric keys or or to set the maximum number of Quick
Copy jobs.
5 Press [OK]. The setting is stored and the Job Box Setting menu
reappears.
JobRet. Deletion (Set Automatic Delete times for Temporary Jobs)
When the set period passes, the temporary jobs are automatically deleted.
1 In the Job Box menu, press or to select Job Box Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The Job Box Setting screen appears.
3 Press or to select JobRet. Deletion and press [OK]. The
JobRet. Deletion screen appears.
Completed.
Job Box Setting:
Storage Media
Exit
03
JobRet. Deletion
02
01
Quick Copy Jobs
Quick Copy Jobs:
32
(0 - 300)
job(s)
Job Box Setting:
Storage Media
Exit
03
JobRet. Deletion
02
01
Quick Copy Jobs
5-29
Document Box
4 Press or to select the desired Automatic Delete time. The list
shows the following times:
Off (automatic delete is not performed)
1 hour (deleted in 1 hour)
4 hours (deleted in 4 hours)
1 day (deleted on the next day)
1 week (deleted after one week)
5 Press [OK]. The setting is stored and the Job Box Setting menu
reappears.
Storage Media (Selecting the storage media for the jobs)
If the optional SSD and SD card are both installed, it is possible to select which storage media to use.
1 In the Job Box menu, press or to select Job Box Setting.
2 Press [OK]. The Job Box Setting screen appears.
3 Press or to select Storage Media and press [OK]. The
Storage Media screen appears.
4 Press or to select the desired storage media. The list shows the
following media:
SSD
SD Card
5 Press [OK]. The setting is stored and the Job Box Setting menu
reappears.
Note After this setting has been done, turn the machine OFF and ON again. This is mandatory to make the
settings effective.
Document Box
5-30
Computer Settings (Printer Driver)
Use the procedure below to store data in a Custom Box or a Job Box.
1 From the application menu, select Print. The Print dialog box
displays.
2 Click the drop down list of printer names. All the printers installed in
Windows are listed. Click the name of the machine.
3 Click Properties. The Properties dialog box displays.
4 Click the Job tab and select the Job storage (e-MPS) check box to
set the function.
Document Box Method for setting the printer driver
Custom Box 1 Select Custom box.
2 Click Settings.
3 Select a Custom Box Settings option:
• Select Use specific box number, and type the box number and password.
• Select Prompt for box number, and click OK. When the Custom Box dialog box
appears, type a box number from the Defined custom boxes list. If a password was
set, type the password.
• Select Display box number list, and click OK. When the Custom Box dialog box
appears, select a box from the list. If a password was set, type the password. This
can be selected if Shared box is selected in the SSD Settings dialog box.
• Select Verify box number for each login user, and click OK. When the Custom
Box dialog box appears, type a box number. To include a password, select Require
password and type the password. This can be selected when Shared box is
selected in the SSD Settings dialog box.
4 Click OK to return to the Print dialog box.
Job Box Quick Copy Select Quick copy.
Proof-and-Hold Select Proof and hold.
Private Print Select Private print and set the Access code.
Stored Job Select Job storage. Set the Access code if necessary.
Note For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the Printing System Driver User Guide.
6-1
6 Status Menu
This chapter contains explanations on the following topics:
Displaying the Status Menu Screen .....................................................................................................6-2
Job Status...............................................................................................................................................6-3
Job Log ...................................................................................................................................................6-4
USB Keyboard........................................................................................................................................6-5
Network................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Wi-Fi ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-6
Wi-Fi Direct ............................................................................................................................................. 6-6
Option Network ......................................................................................................................................6-8
Status Menu
6-2
Displaying the Status Menu Screen
If Status is displayed at the left of the bottom row of the message display
whilst the machine is printing or awaiting printing, it is possible to display
the Status menu screen.
Press [Status] ([Left Select]). The Status menu screen appears.
The following operations are possible on the Status menu screen:
• Job Status...6-3
• Job Log...6-4
• USB Keyboard...6-5
• Network...6-5
• Wi-Fi...6-6
• Wi-Fi Direct...6-6
• Option Network...6-8
Ready to print.
A4 A4
Status
Toner
Status:
Network
Exit
03
Job Log
02
01
Job Status
Note USB Keyboard is only displayed when a USB keyboard is
connected.
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are only displayed when the optional
Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed.
Option Network is only displayed when the optional Network
Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is
installed.
6-3
Status Menu
Job Status
It is possible to check the status of jobs printing or awaiting printing.
In addition to the jobs printed from computers, it is also possible to check reports such as status pages and jobs printed
directly from USB memory.
The information available in the Job Status is listed below.
1 In the Status menu, press or to select Job Status.
2 Press [OK]. Job Status is displayed and a list is displayed of the
job numbers and job names of the jobs currently being printed or
awaiting printing. Also, the type of job and results are indicated for
each job using icons.
3 Press or to select the name of the job whose details you want
to view.
4 Press [Detail] ([Right Select]). The Detail screen appears.
The detailed job status covers 6 pages in all. Press to view to the
next page or to return to the previous page.
Pressing [OK] returns you to the Job Status menu.
Item Content
Results Displayed
Display Icon Description
Job Name Job name Job name Job name
Status Job status Processing r Printing
Pause s Printing suspended
Canceling t Job canceled.
Job Type Job type Printer n Printed from a PC
Report j Report
USB Y Printed from USB memory
Box i Printed from Job Box
Accepted Time Job reception time Day/Month/Year Hour:Minute
†
Month/Day/Year Hour:Minute
†
Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute
†
†
The display differs depending on the countries or regions.
User Name Printed user name User name
Printed Pages Pages printed ***Page(s) No. of pages
***/*** Copies completed/Copies specified
Status Menu
6-4
If the entire name shown as the Job Name will not fit on one line,
pressing [Detail] ([Right Select]) changes to a 3-line name
display.
Pressing [OK] during 3-line name display returns you to single-line
name display.
Job Log
You can use the Job Log to check the history of jobs that have already finished printing.
As well as jobs printed from PCs, this log shows the outcomes for jobs printed directly from USB memory and reports such
as status pages.
It is possible to check the log of the 100 most recent jobs.
The information available in the Job Log is listed below.
1 In the Status menu, press or to select Job Log.
2 Press [OK]. Job Log is displayed, along with the job numbers of
completed jobs and a list of the job names. The job type and result for
each job are also shown as icons.
Detail:
1/ 6Job Name:
Detail
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
0006
Detail:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU
VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz1234567890
Item Content
Results Displayed
Display Icon Description
Job Name Job name Job name Job name
Result Job status OK u Completed normally
Error v Error occurred.
Cancel t Job canceled.
Job Type Job type Printer n Printed from a PC
Report j Report
USB Y Printed from USB memory
Box i Printed from Job Box
Accepted Time Job reception time Day/Month/Year Hour:Minute
†
Month/Day/Year Hour:Minute
†
Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute
†
†
The display differs depending on the countries or regions.
User Name Printed user name User name
Printed Pages Pages printed ***Page(s) No. of pages
***/*** Copies completed/Copies specified
Job Log:
Detail
0006 ABCDEFGHIJ
0005
0004
abcdefghij
0123456789
6-5
Status Menu
3 Press or to select the name of the job whose details you want
to view.
4 Press [Detail] ([Right Select]). The Detail screen appears.
The detailed job log covers 6 pages in all. Press to view to the next
page or to return to the previous page.
Pressing [OK] returns you to the Job Log menu.
If the entire name shown as the Job Name will not fit on one line,
pressing [Detail] ([Right Select]) changes to a 3-line name
display.
USB Keyboard
When a USB keyboard is attached, it is possible to check whether the USB keyboard can be used.
1 In the Status menu, press or to select USB Keyboard.
2 Press [OK]. If the USB keyboard is available for use, Available is
displayed.
Network
It is possible to check the status of the network for the machine.
1 In the Status menu, press or to select Network.
2 Press [OK]. The Network menu is displayed.
3 Press or to select the item you want to check.
The following items can be checked.
•Status
•Host Name
• IP Address(IPv4)
• IP Address(IPv6)
• MAC Address
4 Press [OK]. The selected details appear.
Status Menu
6-6
Wi-Fi
When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed, it is possible to check the status of the option wireless
network.
1 In the Status menu, press or to select Wi-Fi.
2 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi menu is displayed.
3 Press or to select the item you want to check.
The following items can be checked.
•Status
•Host Name
• IP Address(IPv4)
• IP Address(IPv6)
• NetwkName(SSID)
• MAC Address
4 Press [OK]. The selected details appear.
Wi-Fi Direct
You can check the connection status of the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit, and set the network by push-button.
1 In the Status menu, press or to select Wi-Fi Direct.
2 Press [OK]. The Wi-Fi Direct menu is displayed.
The options available in the Wi-Fi Direct settings are as follows:
• PushButton Setup...6-7
• Detail Info...6-7
• ConnectionStatus...6-7
Note Wi-Fi is only displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed.
Wi-Fi:
Host Name
Exit
03
02
01
Status
IP Address(IPv4)
Note Wi-Fi Direct is only displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed.
Wi-Fi Direct:
Detail Info
03
02
01
PushButton Setup
ConnectionStatus
6-7
Status Menu
PushButton Setup
If your computer or mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can set the network by push-button.
1 In the Wi-Fi Direct menu, press or to select PushButton
Setup.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Next] ([Right Select]).
4 When Device Name or NetwkName(SSID) is displayed and the
name is too long to fit on one line, press [Detail] ([Right Select])
to change the name to 3-line display.
Detail Info
It is possible to check the detail information of the Wi-Fi Direct.
1 In the Wi-Fi Direct menu, press or to select Detail Info.
2 Press [OK]. The Detail Info screen appears.
The detailed job log covers 6 pages in all. Press to view to the next
page or to return to the previous page.
Pressing [OK] returns you to the Wi-Fi Direct menu.
3 When Device Name or NetwkName(SSID) is displayed and the
name is too long to fit on one line, press [Detail] ([Right Select])
to change the name to 3-line display.
ConnectionStatus
It is possible to check the status of the Wi-Fi Direct.
1 In the Wi-Fi Direct menu, press or to select
ConnectionStatus.
2 Press [OK]. The ConnectionStatus screen appears.
Press [Menu] ([Right Select]) to display the following items.
• Disconnect All (disconnect all Wi-Fi Direct connections)
• ConnectedDevices (display connected devices)"
Status Menu
6-8
Option Network
When the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed, it is possible to check
the status of the option network.
1 In the Status menu, press or to select Option Network.
2 Press [OK]. The Option Network menu is displayed.
3 Press or to select the item you want to check.
The following items can be checked.
•Status
•Host Name
• IP Address(IPv4)
• IP Address(IPv6)
• NetwkName(SSID) (Only Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51))
• MAC Address
Press [OK]. The selected details appear.
Note Option Network is only displayed when the Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit
(IB-51) is installed.
Option Network:
Status
Host Name
01
02
IP Address(IPv4)
03
7-1
7 Maintenance
This chapter contains explanations on the following topics:
Toner Container Replacement ..............................................................................................................7-2
Replacing the Waste Toner Box ........................................................................................................... 7-7
Cleaning the Printer............................................................................................................................... 7-9
Maintenance
7-2
Toner Container Replacement
The printer displays messages at two stages of toner usage:
• When the printer becomes low on toner, the printer displays the message Toner is running out. as the first
caution. Note the replacement is not always necessary at this stage. Prepare the new toner kit.
• If you ignore the above message and continue printing, the printer displays the message Replace toner. - just
before the toner is used up. The printer will stop printing. The toner container must be replaced immediately. Refer to
Replacing the Toner Container on page 7-3.
Frequency of Toner Container Replacement
The life of the toner containers depends on the amount of toner required to accomplish your printing jobs. According to ISO/
IEC 19752 and EcoPrint switched off the toner container can print as follows (A4/Letter paper is assumed): 12,500 images
(P-4531DN), 15,500 images (P-5031DN) or 25,000 images (P-5531DN and P-6031DN)
Starter Toner Container
The toner container packed with the new printer is a starter toner container. The starter toner container lasts an average of
6,000 images (P-4531DN), 8,000 images (P-5031DN) , or 10,000 images (P-5531DN and P-6031DN).
Toner Kits
• Toner Container
• Waste Toner Box
• Plastic waste bags for old toner container and old waste toner box
• Installation Guide
IMPORTANT During toner container replacement, temporarily move storage media and computer supplies (such as
floppy disks and USB memories) away from the toner container. This is to avoid damaging media by the magnetism
of toner.
Always clean the inside of the printer after replacing the toner container. For details, refer to Cleaning the Printer on
page 7-9.
Copyright owner is not liable against any damages or problems arising from the use of toner containers other than
those designated as original own brand toner containers. For optimum performance, it is also recommended to use
only the own brand toner containers which are specifically intended for use in your country or region. If the toner
container for another destination is installed, the printer will stop printing.
Note To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine own brand toner containers, which must pass numerous
quality inspections.
Information Collection on Memory Chips - The memory chip attached to the toner container is designed to improve
convenience for the end user; to support the recycling operation of empty toner containers; and to gather
information to support new product planning and development. The information gathered is anonymous - it cannot
be associated to any specific individual and the data is intended to be used anonymously.
7-3
Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Container
This section explains how to replace the toner containers. When replacing the toner container, always replace the waste
toner box at the same time. If this box is full, the printer may be damaged or contaminated by the waste toner that may spill
over the box.
IMPORTANT Before replacing the toner container, remove the paper on the MP tray.
1 Open the top cover.
2 Turn the lock lever to the unlock position.
3 Carefully remove the old toner container from the printer.
CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the Toner Container. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Note You do not have to turn printer power off before starting the replacement. Any data that may be processing in
the printer will be deleted if you turn the printer power off.
Top Cover
Lock lever
Maintenance
7-4
4 Put the old toner container in the plastic bag (contained in the toner
kit) and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for
waste disposal.
5 Take the new toner container out of the toner kit.
Plastic Bag
7-5
Maintenance
6 Shake the new toner container at least 10 times as shown in the
figure in order to distribute the toner evenly inside the container.
Do not press too firmly on the center of the toner container or touch
the toner feed slot.
7 Set the new toner container in the printer as shown in the figure.
8 Push down on the top of the toner container to install it firmly in place.
9 Turn the lock lever to the lock position.
IMPORTANT Do not touch the part of the toner container
indicated on the diagram.
Lock lever
Maintenance
7-6
10
Close the top cover.
Proceed to the next section.
Note If the top cover (top tray) does not close, check that the
new toner container is installed correctly (in step 7).
After use, always dispose of the toner container and the
waste toner box in accordance with Federal, State and Local
rules and regulations.
7-7
Maintenance
Replacing the Waste Toner Box
Replace the waste toner box when the Waste toner box is full. message is displayed and when replacing the toner
container. A new waste toner box is included with the toner kit. The waste toner box needs to be replaced before the printer
will operate.
1 Open the left cover.
2 While holding the waste toner box, press the lock lever and then
gently remove the waste toner box.
3 Close the cap to the old waste toner box after removing the box from
the printer.
4 To prevent toner from spilling, put the old waste toner box in the
plastic bag (contained in the toner kit) and discard it later according
to the local code or regulations for waste disposal.
5 Open the cap of the new waste toner box.
CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the Toner Container. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Left Cover
Lock Lever
Note Remove the waste toner box as gently as possible so
as not to scatter the toner inside. Do not let the opening of the
waste toner box face downward.
Old Waste
Toner Box
Cap
Plastic Bag
Cap
New Waste
Toner Box
Maintenance
7-8
6 Insert the new waste toner box as shown in the figure. When the box
is set correctly, it will snap into place.
7 Make sure that the waste toner box is correctly inserted and close the
left cover.
After replacing the toner containers and the waste toner box, clean the
paper transfer unit. For instructions, refer to Cleaning the Printer on page
7-9.
New Waste Toner Box
7-9
Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
To avoid print quality problems, the interior of the printer must be cleaned with every toner container replacement.
IMPORTANT Before cleaning the printer, remove the paper on the MP tray.
1 Open the top cover and front cover.
2 Pull the developer unit together with the toner container.
3 Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the registration
roller (metal).
4 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container, back into
the machine.
Registration
roller (metal)
Maintenance
7-10
5 Close the front cover and top cover.
6 Open the left cover. Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away
from the vents.
7 Close the left cover.
8 Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the vent on the
right side of the machine.
7-11
Maintenance
Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Printer
Prolonged Non-use
If you ever leave the printer unused for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the wall outlet.
We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that
may occur when the printer is used next time.
Moving the Printer
When you move the printer:
• Move it gently.
• Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the printer.
• Be sure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the printer
• Keep the printer horizontal.
WARNING If you ship the printer, remove and pack the developer unit in a plastic bag and ship them
separately from the printer.
Maintenance
7-12
8-1
8 Troubleshooting
This chapter contains explanations on the following topics:
Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................................................8-2
Error Messages ......................................................................................................................................8-6
Clearing Paper Jams ...........................................................................................................................8-18
If a problem cannot be corrected, contact your service technician.
Troubleshooting
8-2
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following
pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Machine Operation Trouble
When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.
Note When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.
To check the serial number, refer to Checking the Equipment's Serial Number on page i
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
An application does not
start.
Is the Auto Panel Reset time short? Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30
seconds or more.
page 4-107
The screen does not
respond when the power
switch is turned on.
Check the power cord. Connect both ends of the power cord
securely.
—
Blank sheets are ejected. — Check that the settings of the
application software.
—
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 2-38
— Turn the orientation 180 degrees
around in which the paper is
positioned.
page 2-38
Is the paper of the supported type? Is
it in good condition?
Remove the paper, turn it over, and
reload it.
page 2-38
Is the paper curled, folded or
wrinkled?
Replace the paper with new paper. page 2-38
Are there any loose scraps or
jammed paper in the machine?
Remove any jammed paper. page 8-18
2 or more sheets are
overlaps when ejected.
(multi feed)
— Load the paper correctly. page 2-38
8-3
Troubleshooting
Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 2-38
— Turn the orientation 180 degrees
around in which the paper is
positioned.
page 2-38
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 2-38
Printouts are curled. ― Turn the paper over in the cassette,
or turn the orientation 180 degrees
around in which the paper is
positioned.
page 2-38
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 2-38
Printer driver cannot be
installed.
Is the driver installed with the host
name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct
function is available?
Specify the IP address instead of the
host name.
—
Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC
outlet.
—
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the power switch. page 2-35
Are the USB cable and network
cable connected?
Connect the correct USB cable and
network cable securely.
—
Cannot print with USB
memory.
USB memory not
recognized.
Is the USB host blocked? Select Unblock in the USB host
settings.
page 4-124
— Check that the USB memory is
securely plugged into the machine.
—
While Auto-IP is already
set to On, the IP address is
not assigned
automatically.
Is a value other than "0.0.0.0"
entered for the link local address of
TCP/IP(v4)?
Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of
TCP/IP(v4).
page 2-5
The machine is emitting
steam in the area around
the paper ejection slot.
Check the room temperature to see if
it is low, or if damp paper was used.
Depending on the printing
environment and the paper's
condition, the heat generated during
printing will cause the moisture in the
paper to evaporate, and the steam
emitted may look like smoke. This is
not a problem, and you can continue
printing. If the steam concerns you,
raise the room temperature, or
replace the paper with a newer, dryer
paper.
—
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
8-4
Printed Image Trouble
When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Printed images are totally
too light.
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 2-38
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 4-54
Is the toner distributed evenly within
the toner container?
Shake the toner container from side
to side several times.
page 7-3
Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable EcoPrint mode. page 4-53
— Make sure the paper type setting is
correct for the paper being used.
page 4-39
— Select the [Menu] > Adjust/
Maint. > Service Setting >
Drum > [OK] > [OK].
—
Printed images are too
dark even though the
background of the
scanned original is white.
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 4-54
— Select the [Menu] > Adjust/
Maint. > Service Setting >
Drum > [OK] > [OK].
—
― Select the [Menu] > Adjust/
Maint. > Service Setting > MC
> [OK] > [OK] and increase the
adjustment value. Increase the
adjustment value 1 level at a time
from the current value. If there is no
improvement after the value is
increased by 1 level, increase by 1
level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to
the original value.
―
Black dots appear on the
white background when
white original is scanned.
— Select the [Menu] > Adjust/
Maint. > Service Setting >
Drum2, load A4 paper in the multi
purpose tray, and select [OK] >
[OK]. (Except P-4531DN)
—
Printed images are fuzzy. Is the device used in an environment
with high humidity or where the
temperature or humidity changes
suddenly?
Use in an environment that has
suitable humidity.
―
― Select the [Men
u] > Adjust/
Mai
nt. > Service Setting >
Drum > [OK] > [OK].
―
8-5
Troubleshooting
Printed images are
skewed.
Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper width
guides.
page 2-38
The altitude is 1000 m or
higher and irregular
horizontal white lines
appear in the image.
― Select [Menu] > Adjust/Maint. >
Service Setting > Altitude
Adj. > 2001 - 3000m or 3001 -
3500m, and select [OK] > [OK].
―
The altitude is 1000 m or
higher and dots appear in
the image.
― Select [Menu] > Adjust/Maint. >
Service Setting > Altitude
Adj. > 2001 - 3000m or 3001 -
3500m, and select [OK] > [OK].
―
Dirt on the top edge or
back of the paper.
Is the interior of the machine dirty? Clean the interior of the machine. page 7-9
Part of the image is
periodically faint or
shows white lines.
― Select the [Menu] > Adjust/
Maint. > Service Setting >
Drum > [OK] > [OK].
―
The previous image
remains and lightly
printed.
― Make sure the paper type setting is
correct for the paper being used.
page 4-39
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
8-6
Error Messages
The following table lists errors and maintenance messages that you can be dealt with by yourself. If
Machine failure.
Call service.
appears, turn off the printer, disconnect the power cord, and contact your service technician.
If
Machine failure. Call service.
or Error occurred. Turn the power switch off and on. is displayed,
turn off the printer then turn it back on to see if the printer has recovered. If the printer has not recovered, turn off the printer,
disconnect the power cord, and contact your service representative or authorized service center.
Some errors cause the alarm to sound. To stop the alarm, press [Cancel].
Message Corrective Action
You can only change the settings selected when logged in as a user with
machine administrator privileges.
The Log in operation failed for the specified number of times so it is no longer
possible to attempt to log in. Contact a system administrator.
It was not possible to connect to the network with the optional wireless network
interface kit.
Check if the access point has been set correctly.
For details, refer to Wireless Network (Wireless network settings) on page 4-83.
This message is displayed when the Job Accounting function is enabled and an
attempt to specify job accounting settings or to register or delete an account
fails. To return the printer to the print-ready status, press [OK].
A machine
administrator right
is required.
Access denied.
You cannot login.
Access point was not
detected.
Account error.
Press [OK].
8-7
Troubleshooting
The paper has run out in the paper source displayed. Supply paper according to
the paper source displayed (paper cassettes, MP tray, optional paper feeders, or
Bulk Paper Feeder).
You can only change the settings selected when logged in as a user with
administrator privileges.
The box capacity is full.
Either delete files or change the capacity of the box.
For details, refer to Custom Box operation (Box creation, editing and
deletion) on page 5-4.
Displayed when data is being canceled.
This appears when the Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct connection did not complete. Check
the settings, and check the signal conditions.
For details, refer to Network (Network settings) on page 4-60.
Message Corrective Action
Add paper in casset.#
Add paper in MP tray.
Add paper in BulkFee.
Administrator only.
Box limit exceeded.
Canceling...
Cannot connect.
Troubleshooting
8-8
Press [OK] and check the following items:
• Registration to Authentication Server
• Password and computer address for Authentication Server
• Connection of Network
For details, refer to Netwk Auth. Set (Netwk authentication setting) on page 4-
131.
Unable to connect to the optional network. Check the optional network settings.
For details, refer to Optional Network (Optional Network settings) on page 4-82.
Is the push button on the multiple access points pressed simultaneously?
Specify an access point which you want to use. and press the push button
again.
Retry the connection by specifying an access point after waiting for a while.
You attempted to print with a paper size and paper type that cannot be used for
duplex printing. Press [Continue] ([Right Select]) to print onto one-side of
the paper only.
This message is shown when operations are restricted in the account when job
accounting is effective.
To change the account settings, refer to Detail/Edit (Checking/editing registered
account ID settings) on page 4-145.
It is not possible to perform sanitization because a job is being processed, etc.
Make sure your ID card has been registered.
Message Corrective Action
Cannot connect to
Authentication Server.
Cannot connect to the
network.
Check the network.
Cannot connect.
Multiple access
points are enabled.
Cannot duplex print
on this paper.
Cannot execute this
job. Restricted by
Authorization
settings.
Cannot perform.
Cannot recognize.
8-9
Troubleshooting
Make sure the USB connector of the ID card reader is correctly connected to
the machine.
If USB Host is set to Block, change the setting to Unblock.
This message is displayed when Remove Memory was selected while a USB
memory was being used.
The previous screen is displayed again 1 or 2 seconds.
The corresponding paper cassette is not installed. Install the cassette.
This message is displayed when a paper lift error has occurred in the paper
source's cassette. Pull out the cassette for the paper source displayed (either
the paper cassettes or optional paper feeders) and check if the paper is loaded
correctly.
The message Call service. is displayed when this error occurs repeatedly.
The left cover of the printer is open. Close the left cover.
The rear cover of the printer is open. Close the rear cover.
The top cover of the printer is open. Close the printer top cover.
Message Corrective Action
Cannot recognize
ID card.
Cannot remove the
memory while in use.
Cassette# not loaded.
Check cassette #.
Close left cover.
Close rear cover.
Close top cover.
Troubleshooting
8-10
The IPv6 address entered in the host name is not enclosed in brackets [ ]. To
enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
Press the power switch to turn off, and then press it again to turn on. If this
message still remains, press the power switch to turn off, and contact your
service representative.
An error occurred when obtaining user information after the authentication. Log
in again.
The file or box selected does not exist.
Check that the box has not been deleted, or that the file has not been deleted or
moved.
The SD card inserted in the printer is not formatted, and therefore cannot be
read or written. To format an SD card, follow the procedure in Format SD Card
(Formatting the SD card) on page 4-102.
The SSD inserted in the printer is not formatted, and therefore cannot be read or
written. To format an SSD, follow the procedure in Format SSD (Formatting the
SSD) on page 4-101.
Message Corrective Action
Enclose
the IPv6 address in
brackets [ ].
Error occurred.
Turn the power
switch off and on.
####
Failed to get the
network user
information.
File was deleted.
Check the document
box.
Format SD card.
Format SSD.
8-11
Troubleshooting
The Account ID does not match.
Check the registered Account ID.
For more information, refer to Job Account.Set. (Job Account setting) on page
4-140.
This message is displayed when the Job Accounting function is enabled and no
account is set for a transmitted print job or the specified account is not
registered (the incorrect account is set).
To return the printer to the print-ready status, press [OK].
For more information, refer to Job Account.Set. (Job Account setting) on page
4-140.
The user ID entered for a private job is not correct. Check the user ID that you
specified on the printer driver.
The NTLM server rejected the authentication. Enter the correct Login User
Name or Password.
Enter the correct Login User Name or Login Password.
Enter the correct password.
This message is displayed when the Job Accounting function is enabled and an
attempt has been made to exceed the print limit set for each account. To return
the printer to the print-ready status, press [OK].
For more information, refer to Job Account.Set. (Job Account setting) on page
4-140.
Message Corrective Action
Incorrect account ID.
Incorrect account ID.
Press [OK].
Incorrect ID.
Incorrect login user
name or password.
Incorrect login user
name or password.
Job is canceled.
Incorrect password.
Job Accounting
restriction exceeded.
Press [OK].
Troubleshooting
8-12
The job is canceled. Press [OK].
Current print processing cannot continue because of occurrence of KPDL error.
To print out an error report, display KPDL Error Rpt. from the menu system,
and select On. Press [OK] to resume printing. You can abandon printing by
pressing [Cancel].
If Auto Error Clear is set to On, printing will be automatically resumed after a
preset period of time.
The added box exceeded the maximum number of box.
Delete it if there is a unnecessary box.
For details, refer to Custom Box operation (Box creation, editing and
deletion) on page 5-4.
The size of the paper in the cassette and the paper size on the paper size dial
are not the same. Check the paper size.
No paper in the Bulk Feeder matches the print data. Set paper in the MP tray.
Press [Continue] ([Right Select]) to resume printing.
If you want to print from a different paper source, press [Alt] ([Left Select]) to
display Alternative: and you can change the source for paper feeding. You
can abandon printing by pressing [Cancel].
Message Corrective Action
Job not stored.
Press [OK].
KPDL error.
Press [OK].
Limit exceeded.
You cannot add any
more.
Load paper in
cassette #.
A4
Different paper
size is set.
Check paper size.
Load paper in
Bulk Feeder.
A4
Plain
8-13
Troubleshooting
The paper cassette matching the paper size and paper type of the print job is
empty. Load paper into the paper cassette as displayed in place of #. Press
[Continue] ([Right Select]) to resume printing.
If you want to print from a different paper source, press [Alt] ([Left Select]) to
display Alternative: and you can change the source for paper feeding. You
can abandon printing by pressing [Cancel].
There is no paper cassette installed in the printer that matches the paper size
and paper type of the print job. Set paper in the MP tray. Press [Continue]
([Right Select]) to resume printing. (Note that feeding the paper having a paper
size which does not match the current paper size from the MP tray can cause
paper jam.)
If you want to print from a different paper source, press [Alt] ([Left Select]) to
display Alternative: and you can change the source for paper feeding. You
can abandon printing by pressing [Cancel].
This message is displayed when Low was selected in Security Level.
#### represents a mechanical error (#=0, 1, 2, ...). Call for service. The printer
does not operate when this message is displayed. The total number of pages
printed is also indicated, e.g. 0123456.
Make a note of the error code displayed on the message display, and contact
your service representative.
The total amount of data received by the printer exceeds the printer’s internal
memory.
Press [OK] to resume printing. You can abandon printing by pressing [Cancel].
If Auto Error Clear is set to On, printing will be automatically resumed after a
preset period of time.
Multi copies cannot be printed because RAM disk is disabled or the SSD is not
installed. Try adding more memory or installing SSD, and configuring the RAM
disk settings.
Press [OK] to print only one copy.
This message is displayed if the installed toner container is non-genuine.
The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for damage caused by a non-
genuine toner.
When you want to use the toner container currently installed, press [OK] and
[Cancel] simultaneously for 3 seconds or more.
Message Corrective Action
Load paper in
cassette #.
A4
Plain
Load paper in
MP tray.
A4
Plain
Low security
Machine failure.
Call service.
####:0123456
Memory is full.
Print job cannot be
processed completely.
No multi copies.
Press [OK].
Non-genuine Toner.
Press [Help].
Troubleshooting
8-14
A paper jam has occurred. The location of the paper jam is indicated in place of
the #’s. For details, refer to Clearing Paper Jams on page 8-18
There is no paper cassette in the feeder, or the cassette is not inserted properly.
After reinserting the corresponding paper cassette, you should be able to print.
When two or more optional feeders are installed and the lowest one is selected,
the same message will appear if any of the upper paper feeder and the printer
cassette is improperly installed.
A RAM disk error has occurred. Look at the error code given in place of ##.
The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows.
02: RAM Disk Mode is set to Off. Set the setting to On. Refer to RAM Disk
Mode (Setting the RAM disk) on page 4-100.
03: The RAM disk is write protected using command operation. Remove the
write protection using the command.
04: No disk space. Purge unnecessary files or increase the RAM disk size. For
more information, refer to RAM Disk Size (RAM disk size setting) on page 4-
101.
05: The desired file does not exist in the RAM disk. Stored the file in the RAM
disk.
10: The file stored in the RAM disk is write protected using command operation.
Remove the write protection using the command.
The machine is under the adjustment to maintain its quality. Please wait.
There are already 100 accounts registered so it is not possible to register any
new accounts.
Replace Maintenance Kit which is displayed on the message display. Contact
your Service Representative.
Message Corrective Action
Paper jammed
##########
[ Help ]
Paper path error.
Set Cassette #.
RAM disk error.
Press [OK].
##
Refreshing drum...
Please wait.
Registered numbers
exceeded.
Cannot add.
Replace MK.
8-15
Troubleshooting
Toner has run out in the toner container. Replace the toner container using a
new toner kit. The printer does not operate when this message is displayed.
This message is displayed when printing was attempted, despite the Job
Account function being on with Restriction applied as the job limit for each job
account.
To return the printer to the print-ready status, press [OK].
For more information, refer to Job Account.Set. (Job Account setting) on page
4-140.
An SD card error has occurred. Look at the error code given in place of ##.
The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows.
02: The printer does not support the SD card inserted, or the SD card is broken.
Install the correct SD card. For details, refer to SD/SDHC Memory Card on page
A-7.
03: The SD card is write protected using command operation. Remove the write
protection using the command.
04: There is not enough space in the SD card. Delete unnecessary files or use a
new SD card.
05: The desired file does not exist in the SD card. Stored the file in the SD card.
10: The file stored in the SD card is write protected using command operation.
Remove the write protection using the command.
An SSD error has occurred. Look at the error code given in place of ##.
The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows.
03: The SSD is write protected using command operation. Remove the write
protection using the command.
04: There is no available SSD space. Delete unnecessary files, etc., in order to
free up space.
05: The desired file does not exist in the SSD. Stored the file in the SSD.
10: The file stored in the SSD is write protected using command operation.
Remove the write protection using the command.
Are three handheld devices connected simultaneously? Cancel a connection to
a portable device that is not being used, or set the machine's auto disconnect
time to break portable device connections.
Copying is not possible because data with the same file name exists at the
destination. Delete the data with the same file name at the destination before
copying.
Message Corrective Action
Replace the toner.
Restricted by
Job Accounting.
Press [OK].
SD card error.
Press [OK].
##
SSD error.
Press [OK].
##
The device cannot be
connected because
allowed connections
would be exceeded.
The file name
already exists.
You cannot copy.
Troubleshooting
8-16
The login user name entered is not registered. Check the login user name.
Replace the waste toner box. For details, refer to Replacing the Waste Toner
Box on page 7-7.
The waste toner box is not installed correctly. Set it correctly. For details, refer to
Replacing the Waste Toner Box on page 7-7.
The account ID set has already been registered. Register a different account ID.
The changed login user name has already been registered. Set a different login
user name.
The toner has run low. Ensure that a new toner container is available without
delay. For details, refer to Toner Container Replacement on page 7-2.
Remove paper from the top tray. Printing then resumes.
Message Corrective Action
The user name is not
registered.
The waste toner
box is full.
The waste toner box
is improperly
installed.
This account ID is
already registered.
This login user name
already registered.
Toner is low.
Top tray is full of
paper.
Remove the paper.
8-17
Troubleshooting
This message is displayed if the installed toner container's regional specification
does not match the machine’s.
Install the specified toner container.
An error has occurred in the USB memory device.
Look at the error code given in place of ##.
The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows.
01: The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded. Split the
large file into multiple smaller files.
The USB memory is write protected. Remove the write protection.
The USB memory is broken.
Even if the problem is not solved, format the USB memory with the device or
use the new USB memory compatible with the printer.
04: There is no available space. Delete unnecessary files, etc., in order to free
up space.
Message Corrective Action
Unknown toner
installed. PC
USB memory error.
Press [OK].
##
Troubleshooting
8-18
Clearing Paper Jams
If paper jams in the paper transport system, or no paper sheets are fed at all, the Paper jam message appears and the
location of the paper jam (the component where the paper jam has occurred) is also indicated. Status Monitor or Embedded
Web Server RX can indicate the location of the paper jam (the component where the paper jam has occurred). Remove the
paper jam. After removing the paper jam, the printer will resume printing.
Possible Paper Jam Locations
The figure below shows the printer's paper paths including the optional paper feeder. The locations where paper jams might
occur are also shown here, with each location explained in the table below. Paper jams can occur in more than one
component on the paper paths.
IMPORTANT The printer may not feed the paper correctly depending on the paper type. Print several pages to
confirm whether the printer can feed the paper. To feed thick paper smoothly, you can select the half speed mode
from the printer driver. For more information, refer to Half Speed Mode (Printer Driver Settings) on page 3-8.
Paper Jam Message
Paper jam
location
Description
Reference
Page
A Paper is jammed at the MP tray. page 8-20
B Paper is jammed at the paper cassette. The
cassette number can be 1 (topmost) to 5
(bottom).
page 8-20
C Paper is jammed inside the duplex section. page 8-21
E
B
B
B
B
B
C
D
A
F
Paper jammed
at MP tray.
Help
Paper
jammed in
Cassette 1.
Help
Paper jammed
in the back
of Cas. 1.
Help
8-19
Troubleshooting
General Considerations for Clearing Jams
Bear in mind the following considerations when attempting paper jam removal:
• If paper jams occur frequently, try using a different type of paper, replace the paper with paper from another ream, or flip
the paper stack over. The printer may have problems if paper jams recur after the paper is replaced.
• Whether or not the jammed pages are reproduced normally after printing is resumed, depends on the location of the
paper jam.
Precautions with Paper Jams
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine. Scraps of
paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
Utilizing Help Messages
When Paper Jam is displayed, press [Help] ([Left Select]) to display the procedure to clear the jam.
Press to display the next step or press to display the previous step.
Press [OK] to exit the online help message display.
D Paper is jammed inside the printer. page 8-22
E Paper is jammed inside the rear unit. page 8-24
F Paper is jammed at the optional bulk paper
feeder.
page 8-25
Paper Jam Message
Paper jam
location
Description
Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
8-20
MP Tray
Paper is jammed at the MP tray. Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below.
1 Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray.
2 Temporarily take the paper remaining in the MP tray out and then put
it back in again.
Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder
Paper is jammed at the cassette. Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below. Paper jams in the cassette
of the optional paper feeder are removed in the same way.
This section explains procedures using Cassette 1 as an example.
1 Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder.
8-21
Troubleshooting
2 Remove any partially fed paper.
3 Push the cassette back in securely. The printer warms up and
resumes printing.
Duplex Unit
Paper is jammed in the duplex section. Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below.
1 Pull out the cassette from the machine.
2 Open the duplex front cover and remove any jammed paper.
Note Check to see if paper is loaded correctly. If not, reload
the paper.
IMPORTANT When pulling out the cassette from the machine,
ensure that it is supported and does not fall out.
Troubleshooting
8-22
3 Close the duplex front cover.
4 Insert the cassette into the slot in the printer. The printer warms up
and resumes printing.
Inside the Printer
Paper is jammed inside the printer . Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below.
1 Open the top cover and front cover.
IMPORTANT Before clearing the jammed paper, remove the
paper on the MP tray.
2 Pull the developer unit together with the toner container.
8-23
Troubleshooting
3 Remove the paper from the printer
If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers, pull it shown in
the figure.
4 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container, back into
the machine.
5 Close the front cover and top cover. The printer warms up and
resumes printing.
Note If you cannot find a paper jam, try checking inside the
rear of the printer. Refer to Rear Unit on page 8-24.
Troubleshooting
8-24
Rear Unit
Paper is jammed in the rear cover . Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below.
1 If paper is not completely ejected into the top tray, open the rear
cover.
2 Open the fuser cover and remove the jammed paper by pulling it out.
3 Close the rear cover.
IMPORTANT If the optional Faceup Output Tray is installed,
remove it before opening the rear cover.
Note If you cannot find a paper jam, try checking inside the
rear of the printer.
CAUTION The fuser unit inside the printer is hot. Do
not touch it with your hands as it may result in burn
injury. Remove jammed paper carefully.
8-25
Troubleshooting
4 Open and close the top cover to clear the error.
Bulk Paper Feeder (Option)
Paper is jammed at the optional bulk paper feeder. Detach the bulk paper feeder from the printer by sliding with the rail away
from the printer, holding the bulk paper feeder by both hands. If paper is partially fed out from the feeder's output slot, pull
the paper out by hand.
Bulk Paper Feeder
1
Hold the Bulk Feeder with both hands and pull out from the printer.
2 Remove the jammed paper from the connection opening between the
Bulk Feeder and printer.
3 Connect the Bulk Feeder to the printer.
Troubleshooting
8-26
4 Open and close the top cover to clear the error. The printer warms up
and resumes printing.
Duplex unit (when Bulk Feeder is installed)
1
Decrease the amount of paper in the Bulk Feeder.
2 Pull the Bulk Feeder out from the printer. Hold the bulk feeder with
both hands and lift to remove.
3 Pull out the cassette from the machine.
8-27
Troubleshooting
4 Open the duplex front cover and remove any jammed paper.
5 After replacing the cassette in the machine and connecting the bulk
feeder to the printer, open and close the top cover to clear the error.
Printing will resume after the printer warms up.
Troubleshooting
8-28
A-1
Appendix
This chapter contains explanations on the following topics:
Character Entry Method ....................................................................................................................... A-2
About the Options................................................................................................................................. A-5
Expansion Memory Modules ............................................................................................................... A-6
General Description of Options........................................................................................................... A-7
Paper .....................................................................................................................................................A-11
Specifications...................................................................................................................................... A-21
For availability of the options, consult your service technician.
Appendix
A-2
Character Entry Method
In character entry screens, use the procedure below to enter characters.
Keys Used
Use the following keys to enter characters.
1[Back] Key: Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen.
2 Numeric Keys: Use these keys to select the character you want to enter.
3 [Right Select] Key: Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter. (When [Text] is displayed)
4 Arrow Keys: Use these to select the entry position, or select a character from the character list.
5[OK] Key: Press this key to finalize the entered character(s).
6[Clear] Key: Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position. If the cursor is at the end of the line, the
character to the left of it is deleted.
1
2
3
4
5
6
A-3
Appendix
Selecting Type of Characters
To enter characters, the following three types are available:
In a character entry screen, press [Text] ([Right Select]) to select the
type of characters you want to enter.
Each time you press [Text] ([Right Select]), the character type
switches as follows: ABC, 123, Symbols, ABC ...
Entering Characters
After selecting a character type, use the procedure below to enter characters.
Entering Alphabets and Numerals
Referring to the table below, press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed.
File Name Entry:
Text
doc
ABC
Text
ABC
Current character type
Text
123
Symbols:
Text
!#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_`{}
~~¡£¤
¥¦§¨©ª«¬-®¯°±²³´¶·¸¹º
Types Description
ABC To enter alphabets.
123 To enter numerals.
Symbols To enter symbols.
Key Entry mode Available characters
Alphabetic/Symbol . @ - _ / : ~ 1
Numeric 1
Alphabetic/Symbol a b c A B C 2
Numeric 2
Alphabetic/Symbol d e f D E F 3
Numeric 3
Alphabetic/Symbol g h i G H I 4
Numeric 4
Appendix
A-4
Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively. To enter a character associated with the same key
after another, use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it.
If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there,
spaces are automatically entered in between.
Entering Symbols
Press [Text] ([Right Select]) to display the Symbols screen. Use cursor keys to select the symbol you want to enter and
then press [OK].
Alphabetic/Symbol j k l J K L 5
Numeric 5
Alphabetic/Symbol m n o M N O 6
Numeric 6
Alphabetic/Symbol p q r s P Q R S 7
Numeric 7
Alphabetic/Symbol t u v T U V 8
Numeric 8
Alphabetic/Symbol w x y z W X Y Z 9
Numeric 9
Alphabetic/Symbol . , - _ ’ ! ? (space) 0
Numeric 0
Alphabetic/Symbol Switch between upper-/lowercase
Numeric . (period)
Note The symbols that can be entered for the function are displayed.
Key Entry mode Available characters
Symbols:
Text
!#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_`{}
~~¡£¤
¥¦§¨©ª«¬-®¯°±²³´¶·¸¹º
A-5
Appendix
About the Options
This printer has the following options available to satisfy your printing requirements. For instructions on installing individual
options, refer to the documentation included with the option. Some options are explained in the following sections.
Faceup Output Tray PT-320 Expansion Memory
Network Interface Kit
IB-50
SSD
HD-6/HD-7
USB Flash Memory
Paper Feeder PF-320
SD Memory Card
SDHC Memory Card
Parallel Interface Kit
IB-32B
Wireless Network
Interface Kit IB-36
Software option
Data Security Kit(E)
UG-33
Card Authentication Kit(B)
Bulk Feeder PF-3100
Wireless Network
Interface Kit IB-51
Appendix
A-6
Expansion Memory Modules
The printer's main controller board has a memory slot into which you can plug in optional memory modules (dual in line
memory modules). You can increase the printer's memory up to 2.5 GB by plugging in the optional memory modules.
Expansion Memory Modules
You can select additional memory modules from 512, 1024 or 2048 MB.
Checking Expansion Memory
After installing expansion memory, use the following method to check that it is correctly installed.
1 In the Report Print menu, press or to select Status Page.
2 Press [OK]. A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Press [Yes] ([Left Select]). Accepted. appears and the printer
prints the status page.
Check the amount of memory with the printed status page. If the
memory addition has been done correctly, the total amount of
memory will have increased. (The amount of memory when shipped
from the factory is 256 MB.)
Note A 512 MB memory module is already installed at the factory. To expand memory up to 2.5 GB, install
2048 MB memory module.
Print.
Are you sure?
Yes
No
Status Page
A-7
Appendix
General Description of Options
SD/SDHC Memory Card
The printer is equipped with a slot for an SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB, and an SD memory card with
a maximum size of 2 GB. An SD/SDHC memory card is useful for storing fonts, macros, and overlays.
This enables high-speed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Job Box functions.
For details, refer to Job Box on page 5-21.
Reading the SD/SDHC Memory Card
Once inserted in the printer’s slot, the contents of the SD/SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or
automatically when you power on or reset the printer.
PF-320 Paper Feeder
The optional paper feeder PF-320 will each hold approximately
500 sheets of paper. Up to 4 optional feeders can be added to the bottom
of the printer, allowing continuous feeding of up to 2,500 sheets of paper
when combined with the printer's own cassette.
IMPORTANT When you use the paper feeder, place the papers print-
side down.
For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to Selecting the Right
Paper on page A-13. For the paper type setting, refer to Media Type
(Setting the cassette paper type) on page 4-37.
SSD (HD-6/HD-7)
With SSD installed in the printer, received data can be rasterized and stored on this SSD. This enables high-speed printing
of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Document Box functions. For details, refer to
Document Box on page 5-1.
Network Interface Kit (IB-50)
The Network Interface Kit is a high-speed interface for communications speeds of 1 gigabit per second. In addition to the
TCP/IP and NetBEUI supported by the machine's standard network interface, it also supports IPX/SPX and Apple Talk, so
network printing becomes possible in various environments, including Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and Netware.
The installation method is the same as for SSD.
Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51)
This is a Wireless Network Interface Kit which supports the wireless network specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps)
and 11 g/b.
With the utilities supplied, settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols.
The installation method is the same as for SSD.
IMPORTANT Unencrypted data is saved on the SD/SDHC memory card.
Exercise caution when saving sensitive documents.
Appendix
A-8
Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36)
This is a wireless LAN Interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 65 Mbps) and 11
g/b. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct is supported.
Parallel Interface Kit (IB-32B)
The parallel interface kit supports communications speeds up to 2 Mbps. Use a parallel printer cable when this option is
used.
USB Memory
USB memory is a type of simple, highly portable flash memory that plugs
into the USB memory slot. Files stored in USB memory can be printed by
plugging the USB memory into the printer and then specifying the desired
file names from the operation panel.
The operation panel displays the names of PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS and
OpenXPS files.
Up to 1,000 files can be printed from USB memory. Files with names
consisting of up to 255 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be
printed.
Any double-byte characters included in a file name appear as corrupted
text in the message list. Also, when the file is printed an error message
appears and printing fails.
For information on printing PDF files stored in USB memory, refer to USB
Memory (USB memory selection) on page 4-21.
For information on supported USB memory devices, contact your service
technician.
A-9
Appendix
PT-320 Faceup Output Tray (Only P-5031DN/P-5531DN/P-6031DN)
Use the faceup output tray when you wish paper to be stacked with the printed side facing up (reverse order).
To install the faceup output tray, perform the following procedures:
1 Install the paper stopper according to the size of paper to be used.
2 Install the faceup output tray on the rear of the printer.
Appendix
A-10
Other Options
PF-3100 Bulk Paper Feeder
Holds approximately 2,000 sheets of 76 to 216 mm × 148 to 305 mm size paper. This bulk paper feeder can be attached to
the front of the printer after the MP tray has been removed.
Data Security Kit(E)
The security kit overwrites data which is no longer necessary to make it difficult to restore it. Also, when data is stored on
the SSD, it encrypts the data then writes it. It is not possible to decode (read) anything other than in normal outputs and
operations, so this provides greater security should it become necessary.
Card Authentication Kit(B)
It is possible to perform user authentication with an ID card. To perform authentication with an ID card, it is necessary to first
register the ID card information in the list of registered users. For the method for registration, refer to the Card Authentication
Kit (B) Operation Guide.
USB Keyboard
A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also
available to install the keyboard on the printer Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on
keyboards that are compatible with your printer before you purchase one.
ThinPrint Option
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
A-11
Appendix
Paper
General Guidelines
The machine is designed to print on standard copier paper (the type used in ordinary dry copier machines), but it can also
accept a variety of other types of paper within the limits specified below.
Selection of the right paper is important. Using the wrong paper can result in paper jams, curling, poor print quality, and
paper waste, and in extreme cases can damage the machine. The guidelines given below will increase the productivity of
your office by ensuring efficient, trouble-free printing and reducing wear and tear on the machine.
Paper Availability
Most types of paper are compatible with a variety of machines. Paper intended for xerographic copiers can also be used
with the machine.
There are three general grades of paper: economy, standard, and premium. The most significant difference between grades
is the ease with which they pass through the machine. This is affected by the smoothness, size, and moisture content of
the paper, and the way in which the paper is cut. The higher the grade of paper you use, the less risk there will be of paper
jams and other problems, and the higher the level of quality your printed output will reflect.
Differences between papers from different suppliers can also affect the machine’s performance. A high-quality printer
cannot produce high-quality results when the wrong paper is used. Low-priced paper is not economical in the long run if it
causes printing problems.
The recommended basis weight is:
• Cassette: 60 to 120 g/m²
• MP tray: 60 to 220 g/m², 209.5 g/m² (Cardstock)
• PF-320: 60 to 120 g/m²
• PF-3100: 60 to 220 g/m²
Paper Specifications
The following table summarizes the basic paper specifications. Details are given on the following pages.
Note The manufacturer assumes no liability for problems that occur when paper not satisfying these requirements
is used.
Item Specification
Weight Cassette, PF-320: 60 to 120 g/m²
MP Tray, PF-3100: 60 to 220 g/m², 209.5 g/m² (Cardstock)
Dimensions Refer to Paper Sizes on page A-13
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm (±0.0276 inches)
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Moisture content 4 % to 6 %
Pulp content 80 % or more
Appendix
A-12
Minimum and Maximum Paper Sizes
The minimum and maximum paper sizes are as follows. For non standard paper such as transparency, labels, vellum,
cardstock, envelope and thick, the MP (Multi-Purpose) tray must be used. For information on how to set paper sizes, refer
to MP Tray Set. (MP tray settings) on page 4-30.
Recommended Paper
The following products are recommended for use with the printer for optimum performance.
Note On the optional paper feeder (PF-320), the minimum size is 92 × 162 mm (3.62 × 6.38 inches) and the
maximum size is 216 × 356 mm (8.5 × 14 inches).
Size Product Weight
Letter, Legal International Paper Hammermill Tidal MP 75 g/m² (20 lb)
A4 Nautilus ReFresh TRIOTEC 80 g/m²
105 mm
4.13 inches
148 mm 5.83 inches
216 mm
8.5 inches
356 mm
14.02 inches
Minimum
Paper Size
Maximum
Paper Size
Paper Cassette MP Tray
70 mm
2.76 inches
148 mm 5.83 inches
216 mm
8.5 inches
356 mm
14 .02 inches
Minimum
Paper Size
Maximum
Paper Size
A-13
Appendix
Selecting the Right Paper
This section describes the guidelines for selecting paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper that is bent at the edges, curled, dirty, torn, embossed, or contaminated with lint, clay, or paper shreds.
Use of paper in these conditions can lead to illegible printing and paper jams, and can shorten the life of the machine. In
particular, avoid using paper with a surface coating or other surface treatment. Paper should have as smooth and even a
surface as possible.
Composition
Do not use paper that has been coated or surface-treated and contains plastic or carbon. The heat of fusing can cause such
paper to give off harmful fumes.
Bond paper should contain at least 80 % pulp. Not more than 20 % of the total paper content should consist of cotton or
other fibers.
Paper Sizes
Cassettes and the MP tray are available for the paper sizes listed in the table below. For details, including the paper sizes
for the paper feeder (Optional paper feeder PF-320) refer to Setting the standard paper size on page 4-32.
The dimensional tolerances are ±0.7 mm (±0.0276 inches) for the length and width. The angle at the corners must be 90°
±0.2°.
Yes: Can be stored No: Cannot be stored
Paper Size Size
Cassette
(P-4531DN)
Cassette
(P-5031DN/
P-5531DN/P-
6031DN)
Cassette
(PF-320)
Bulk Paper
Feeder
(PF-3100)
MP Tray
Envelope Monarch 3.88 × 7.5 inches No No Yes Yes Yes
Envelope #10 4.13 × 9.5 inches No No Yes Yes Yes
Envelope DL 110 × 220 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Envelope C5 162 × 229 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Executive 7.25 × 10.5 inches Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter 8.5 × 11 inches Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Legal 8.5 × 14 inches Yes Yes Yes No Yes
A4 210 × 297 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5(JIS) 182 × 257 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5-R 148 × 210 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5 210 × 148 mm Yes Yes No No Yes
A6 105 × 148 mm No Yes No Yes
†
Yes
B6 128 × 182 mm No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Envelope #9 3.88 × 8.88 inches No No Yes Yes Yes
Envelope #6-3/4 3.63 × 6.5 inches No No Yes Yes
†
Yes
ISO B5 176 × 250 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Hagaki 100 × 148 mm No No No Yes
†
Yes
Appendix
A-14
Smoothness
The paper should have a smooth, uncoated surface. Paper with a rough or sandy surface can cause voids in the printed
output. Paper that is too smooth can cause multiple feeding and fogging problems. (Fogging is a gray background effect.)
Basis Weight
Basis weight is the weight of paper expressed in grams per square meter (g/m²). Paper that is too heavy or too light may
cause feed errors or paper jams as well as premature wear of the product. Uneven weight of paper, namely uneven paper
thickness may cause multiple-sheet feeding or print quality problems such as blurring because of poor toner fusing.
The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 120 g/m² (16 and 32 lb/ream) for the cassette and between 60 and
220 g/m² (16 and 59 lb/ream) for the MP tray.
Paper Weight Equivalence Table
The paper weight is listed in pounds (lb) and metric grams per square meter (g/m²). The shaded part indicates the standard
weight.
OufukuHagaki 148 × 200 mm No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Oficio II 8.5 × 13 inches Yes Yes Yes No Yes
216 × 340 mm 216 × 340 mm Yes Yes Yes No Yes
16 kai 197 × 273 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Statement 5.5 × 8.5 inches Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Folio 210 × 330 mm Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Youkei 4 105 × 235 mm No No Yes Yes Yes
Youkei 2 114 × 162 mm No No Yes Yes
†
Yes
Custom Cassette:
105 to 216 mm × 148 to 356 mm (4.13 to 8.5 inches × 5.83 to 14.02 inches)
Cassette (PF-320):
92 to 216 mm × 162 to 356 mm (3.62 to 8.5 inches × 6.38 to 14.02 inches)
MP Tray:
70 to 216 mm × 148 to 356 mm (2.76 to 8.5 inches × 5.83 to 14.02 inches)
Bulk Paper Feeder (PF-3100):
76 to 216 mm × 148 to 305 mm (2.99 to 8.5 inches × 5.83 to 12.01 inches)
†
The paper size can be specified using the printer driver. However, feeding paper depends on the paper type.
U. S. Bond Weight (lb) Europe Metric Weight (g/m²) U. S. Bond Weight (lb) Europe Metric Weight (g/m²)
16 60 32 120
17 64 34 128
20 75 36 135
21
80 39 148
Paper Size Size
Cassette
(P-4531DN)
Cassette
(P-5031DN/
P-5531DN/P-
6031DN)
Cassette
(PF-320)
Bulk Paper
Feeder
(PF-3100)
MP Tray
A-15
Appendix
Moisture Content
Moisture content is defined as the percent ratio of moisture to the dry mass of the paper. Moisture can affect the paper’s
appearance, feed ability, curl, electrostatic properties, and toner fusing characteristics.
The moisture content of the paper varies with the relative humidity in the room. When the relative humidity is high and the
paper absorbs moisture, the paper edges expand, becoming wavy in appearance. When the relative humidity is low and
the paper loses moisture, the edges shrink and tighten, and print contrast may suffer.
Wavy or tight edges can cause jams and alignment anomalies.
To ensure correct moisture content, it is important to store the paper in a controlled environment. Some tips on moisture
control are:
• Store paper in a cool, dry location.
• Keep the paper in its wrapping as long as possible. Re-wrap paper that is not in use.
• Store paper in its original carton. Place a pallet etc. under the carton to separate it from the floor.
• After removing paper from storage, let it stand in the same room as the machine for 48 hours before use.
• Avoid leaving paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or damp.
Paper Grain
When paper is manufactured, it is cut into sheets with the grain running parallel to the length (long grain) or parallel to the
width (short grain). Short grain paper can cause feeding problems in the machine. All paper used in the machine should be
long grain.
Other Paper Properties
Porosity: Indicates the density of paper fiber.
Stiffness: Limp paper may buckle in the machine, resulting in paper jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl one way if left unpacked.
Electrostatic discharge: During the printing process the paper is electrostatically charged to attract the toner. The paper
must be able to release this charge so that printed sheets do not cling together in the Output Tray.
Whiteness: The contrast of the printed page depends on the whiteness of the paper. Whiter paper provides a sharper,
brighter appearance.
Quality control: Uneven sheet size, corners that are not square, ragged edges, welded (uncut) sheets, and crushed edges
and corners can cause the machine to malfunction in various ways. A quality paper supplier should take considerable care
to ensure that these problems do not occur.
Packaging: Paper should be packed in a sturdy carton to protect it from damage during transport. Quality paper obtained
from a reputable supplier is usually correctly packaged.
22 81 42 157
24 90 43 163
27
100 47 176
28 105 53 199
Note When using coated paper, be aware that the sheets will stick together in a very humid environment.
Note You might see the printer emitting steam in the area around the top tray if you use damp paper, but it is safe
to continue printing.
U. S. Bond Weight (lb) Europe Metric Weight (g/m²) U. S. Bond Weight (lb) Europe Metric Weight (g/m²)
Appendix
A-16
Special Paper
The following types of special paper can be used:
Use paper that is sold specifically for use with copiers or printers (heat-fusing type). When using labels, thin paper,
postcards, or thick paper, feed the paper from the MP tray. For details, refer to MP Tray Set. (MP tray settings) on page 4-30.
Since the composition and quality of special paper vary considerably, special paper is more likely than white bond paper to
give trouble during printing. No liability will be assumed if moisture and so forth given off during printing on special paper
causes harm to the machine or operator.
Transparency
To prevent printing problems, feed transparencies into the printer one
sheet at a time from the MP tray. Always load the transparencies vertically
(with the long edge towards the printer).
If the transparencies have rough edges on the back, it may cause a paper
jam. Remove the rough edges, reverse the sides, feed the sheet from the
opposite edge, or flip the sheet over.
When unloading transparencies (e.g., for clearing jams), hold them
carefully by the edges to avoid leaving fingerprints on them.
Paper Type to be Used Paper Type to be Selected
Overhead projector transparencies Transparency
Rough paper Rough
Thin paper Vellum
Label Labels
Recycled paper Recycled
Preprinted paper Preprinted
Bond paper Bond
Postcards Cardstock
Colored paper Color
Prepunched paper Prepunched
Letterhead Letterhead
Envelopes Envelope
Thick paper Thick
High-quality paper High Quality
Custom Custom 1~8
Note Before purchasing any type of special paper, test a sample on the machine and check that printing quality is
satisfactory.
A-17
Appendix
Labels
Labels must be fed from the MP tray.
The basic rule for printing on adhesive labels is that the adhesive must never come into contact with any part of the machine.
Adhesive paper sticking to the drum or rollers will damage the machine.
Label paper has a structure comprising of three layers, as shown in the
diagram. The top sheet is printed on. The adhesive layer consists of
pressure-sensitive adhesives. The carrier sheet (also called the linear or
backing sheet) holds the labels until used. Due to the complexity of its
composition, adhesive-backed label paper is particularly likely to give
printing problems.
Adhesive label paper must be entirely covered by its top sheet, with no
spaces between the individual labels. Labels with spaces in between are
liable to peel off, causing serious paper jam problems.
Some label paper is manufactured with an extra margin of top sheet
around the edge. Do not remove the extra top sheet from the carrier sheet
until after printing is finished.
The table below lists the specifications for adhesive label paper.
Top sheet (white
bond paper)
Adhesive
Carrier sheet
Item Specification
Weight of top sheet 44 to 74 g/m² (12 to 20 lb/ream)
Basis weight 104 to 151 g/m² (28 to 40 lb/ream)
Thickness of top sheet 0.086 to 0.107 mm (3.9 to 4.2 mils)
Composite thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm (4.5 to 5.7 mils)
Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)
Top sheet
UnacceptableAcceptable
Carrier sheet
Appendix
A-18
Postcards
Fan the stack of postcards and align the edges before loading them in the MP tray. Make sure the postcards you are going
to set are not curled. Feeding curled postcards may cause paper jams.
Some postcards have rough edges on the back (those are created when
the paper is cut). In this case, put the postcards on a flat place and rub
the edges with, for example, a ruler to smooth them.
Envelopes
Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side up or the
optional paper feeder (PF-320) with the print-side down.
Since the composition of an envelope is more complex than that of
ordinary paper, it is not always possible to ensure consistent printing
quality over the entire envelope surface.
Normally, envelopes have a diagonal grain direction. Refer to Paper
Grain on page A-15. This direction can easily cause wrinkles and creases
when envelopes pass through the printer. Before purchasing envelopes,
make a test print to check whether the printer accepts the envelope.
• Do not use envelopes that have an encapsulated liquid adhesive.
• Avoid a long printing session for envelopes only. Extended envelope
printing can cause premature printer wear.
• If jams occur, try setting a lesser number of envelopes on the MP tray.
• To avoid jams caused by curled envelopes, stack no more than 5
printed envelopes on the top tray.
Rough
Edge
Rough
Edge
Note Do not load paper above the load limits located on the
paper width guide.
A-19
Appendix
Thick Paper
Fan the stack of paper and align the edges before loading them in the MP tray. Some types of paper have rough edges on
the back (those are created when the paper is cut). In this case, put the paper on a flat place and rub the edges once or
twice with, for example, a ruler to smooth them. Feeding rough edged paper may cause paper jams.
Colored Paper
Colored paper should satisfy the same conditions as white bond paper, refer to Paper Specifications on page A-11. In
addition, the pigments used in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of fusing during the printing process (up to
200 °C or 392 °F).
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper should satisfy the same conditions as white bond paper, refer to Paper Specifications on page A-11. The
preprinted ink must be able to withstand the heat of fusing during the printing process, and must not be affected by silicone
oil. Do not use paper with any kind of surface treatment, such as the type of paper commonly used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Select recycled paper that meets the same specifications as the white bond paper except for whiteness, refer to Paper
Specifications on page A-11.
Note If the paper jams even after you smooth it out, load the
paper in the MP tray with the leading edge rose up a few
millimeters as shown in the illustration.
Note Before purchasing recycled paper, test a sample on the machine and check that the printing quality is
satisfactory.
Appendix
A-20
Paper Type
The printer is capable of printing under the optimum setting for the type of paper being used.
Setting the paper type for the paper source from the printer’s operation panel will cause the printer to automatically select
the paper source and print in the mode best suited to that type of paper.
A different paper type setting can be made for each paper source including the MP tray. Not only can preset paper types be
selected, but it is also possible for you to define and select customized paper types. Refer to Media Type Set. (Paper type
settings) on page 4-39. The following types of paper can be used.
Yes: Can be stored No: Cannot be stored
Paper Type
Paper Source
MP Tray /
Optional Bulk Paper
Feeder PF-3100
Paper
Cassette
Optional
Paper Feeder
PF-320
Paper Weight Duplex Path
Plain Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes
Transparency Yes NoNoExtra HeavyNo
Preprinted Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes
Labels Yes NoNoHeavy 1No
Bond Yes Yes Yes Normal 3 Yes
Recycled Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes
Vellum Yes NoNoLight No
Rough Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes
Letterhead Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes
Color Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes
Prepunched Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes
Envelope Yes No Yes Heavy 3 No
Cardstock Yes NoNoHeavy 3No
Thick Yes NoNoHeavy 3No
High Quality Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes
Custom 1 (to 8)
†
†
This is a paper type defined and registered by the user. Up to eight types of user settings may be defined. For details, refer
to Media Type Set. (Paper type settings) on page 4-39.
Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes
A-21
Appendix
Specifications
Machine
Note Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Item
Description
P-4531DN P-5031DN P-5531DN P-6031DN
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor, single drum system
Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 120 g/m
2
MP Tray 60 to 220 g/m
2
, 209.5 g/m
2
(Cardstock)
Paper Types Cassette Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, High
Quality, and CUSTOM 1 (to 8)
MP Tray Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Labels, Bond, Recycled, Vellum, Rough,
Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Envelope, Cardstock, Thick, High Quality, and
CUSTOM 1 (to 8)
Paper Sizes Cassette Envelope DL,
Envelope C5,
Executive, 8 1/2 ×
11"(Letter), 8 1/2 ×
14"(Legal), A4,
B5, A5, A5-R, ISO
B5, Oficio II, 216 ×
340 mm, 16K,
Statement, Folio,
and Custom
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Executive, 8 1/2 × 11"(Letter),
8 1/2 × 14"(Legal), A4, B5, A5, A5-R, A6, B6, ISO B5,
Oufuku Hagaki, Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, Statement,
Folio, and Custom
MP Tray Envelope Monarch, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Executive, 8 1/2
× 11"(Letter), 8 1/2 × 14"(Legal), A4, B5, A5, A5-R, A6, B6, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6, ISO B5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, 16K,
Statement, Folio, Youkei 2, Youkei 4, and Custom
Magnification ratio 20 to 500%, 1% increments
Printing
Speeds
Simplex A4: 45 ppm
B5: 36 ppm
A5: 12 ppm
Letter: 47 ppm
Legal: 38 ppm
A4: 50 ppm
B5: 40 ppm
A5: 27 ppm
A6: 27 ppm
Letter: 52 ppm
Legal: 42 ppm
A4: 55 ppm
B5: 44 ppm
A5: 29 ppm
A6: 29 ppm
Letter: 57 ppm
Legal: 46 ppm
A4: 60 ppm
B5: 48 ppm
A5: 32 ppm
A6: 32 ppm
Letter: 62 ppm
Legal: 50 ppm
Duplex A4: 22.5 ppm
B5: 18 ppm
A5: 11.5 ppm
Letter: 23.5 ppm
Legal: 19 ppm
A4: 36 ppm
B5: 28 ppm
A5: 19 ppm
Letter: 37 ppm
Legal: 21 ppm
A4: 39.5 ppm
B5: 20.3 ppm
A5: 20.3 ppm
Letter: 40.5 ppm
Legal: 23 ppm
A4: 42 ppm
B5: 34 ppm
A5: 23 ppm
Letter: 44 ppm
Legal: 25 ppm
First Print Time (A4, feed from
Cassette)
5.9 seconds or less 6.2 seconds or less 6.6 seconds or less 4.9 seconds or less
Appendix
A-22
Warm-up Time
(22°C,
60%RH)
Power On 15 seconds or less 20 seconds or less 25 seconds or less 25 seconds or less
Sleep
†
15 seconds or less 20 seconds or less 25 seconds or less 25 seconds or less
Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets (80 g/m
2
)
MP Tray 100 sheets (80 g/m
2
)
Output Tray
Capacity
Top Tray 250 sheets 500 sheets
Face-up Tray – 250 sheets
Continuous printing 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution Fine 1200 mode, Fast 1200 mode, 600 dpi, 300 dpi
Operation
Environment
Temperature 10 to 32.5 °C (50 to 90.5 °F)
Relative Humidity 15 to 80 %
Altitude 3,500 m (8,202 feet) maximum
Illumination 1,500 lux maximum
Controller ARM Cortex-A9, ARM Cortex-M3
Operating Systems Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/
R2, Mac OS 10.5 or later
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1
USB Host: 2
eKUIO slot:1
Option HD-6/HD-7, IB-50, IB-51, IB-36, IB-32B
PDL PRESCRIBE
Emulation PCL6 (PCL5e, PCL-XL), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), XPS, Open XPS,
TIFF/JPEG Direct Print, IBM Proprinter, LQ-850, Line Printer
Memory Standard 512 MB
Maximum 2.5 GB
Dimensions (W × D × H) 380 × 410 × 285
mm
15 × 16 9/64 × 11-
1/4"
380 × 410 × 320 mm
15 × 16 9/64 × 12 5/8"
Weight
Approx. 14.5 kg
(32 lbs)
Approx. 15.5 k
g (34.2 lbs)
Power Requirement 120 V, 60 Hz,
9.5 A
220-240 V, 50 Hz/
60 Hz, 5.4 A
120 V, 60 Hz, 10.0 A
220-240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz, 5.6 A
Item
Description
P-4531DN P-5031DN P-5531DN P-6031DN
A-23
Appendix
Power
Consumption
(
Standard)
Maximum 1148 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1218 W
(European
countries)
1153 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1222 W
(European
countries)
1164 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1238 W
(European
countries)
1164 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1238 W
(European
countries)
During Printing 644 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
618 W (European
countries)
700 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
636 W (European
countries)
753 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
757 W (European
countries)
789 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
757 W (European
countries)
During Standby 12.5 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
12.5 W (European
countries)
10.3 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
10.5 W (European
countries)
10.3 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
12.5 W (European
countries)
10.3 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
12.5 W (European
countries)
Sleep Mode
†
1.0 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1.0 W (European
countries)
1.0 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1.0 W (European
countries)
1.0 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1.0 W (European
countries)
1.0 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1.0 W (European
countries)
Power Off 0.1 W or less
Power
Consumption
(With options)
Maximum 1180 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1256 W
(European
countries)
1185 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1256 W
(European
countries)
1204 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1275 W
(European
countries)
1204 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
1275 W
(European
countries)
During Printing 696 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
679 W (European
countries)
761 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
715 W (European
countries)
866 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
811 W (European
countries)
866 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
811 W (European
countries)
During Standby 19.4 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
20 W (European
countries)
19.1 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
19.6 W (European
countries)
18.8 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
19.6 W (European
countries)
18.8 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
19.6 W (European
countries)
Sleep Mode
†
4.7 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
4.7 W (European
countries)
4.7 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
4.7 W (European
countries)
4.7 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
4.7 W (European
countries)
4.7 W (U.S.A./
Canada)
4.7 W (European
countries)
Power Off 0.1 W or less
The power consumption of the product
in networked standby (If all network
ports are connected.)
1.0 W
Item
Description
P-4531DN P-5031DN P-5531DN P-6031DN
Appendix
A-24
Paper Feeder (PF-320) (Option)
Option Expanded
memory, Paper
Feeder (500-sheet
× 4), SSD (HD-6/
HD-7), SD Card,
Network Interface
Kit (IB-50),
Wireless Network
Interface Kit (IB-
51), Wireless
Network Interface
Kit (IB-36),
Parallel Interface
Kit (IB-32B), Bulk
Paper Feeder (PF-
3100)
Expanded memory, Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 4), SSD
(HD-6/HD-7), SD Card, Network Interface Kit (IB-50),
Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51), Wireless Network
Interface Kit (IB-36), Parallel Interface Kit (IB-32B), Bulk
Paper Feeder (PF-3100), Faceup Output Tray (PT-320)
†
The value is at Energy Saver mode (default).
Item
Description
P-4531DN P-5031DN P-5531DN P-6031DN
Item Description
The maximum number of paper
cassettes
4
Paper size Envelope Monarch, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Executive, 8 1/2
× 11"(Letter), 8 1/2 × 14"(Legal), A4, B5, A5, B6, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
ISO B5, Oufuku Hagaki, Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, Statement, Folio, Youkei
2, Youkei 4, and Custom
Paper type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched,
Envelope, High Quality, and CUSTOM 1 (to 8)
Paper capacity 500 sheets (80 g/m
2
)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 380 × 410 × 121 mm
15 × 16 1/8 × 4 3/4"
Weight 3.8 kg or less (8.4 lbs or less)
A-25
Appendix
Bulk Paper Feeder (PF-3100) (Option)
SSD (HD-6/HD-7) (Option)
Item Description
Paper size Envelope Monarch, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Executive,
Letter, A4, B5, A5, A6, B6, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, ISO B5, Custom, Hagaki,
Oufuku Hagaki, 16K, Statement, Youkei 2 and Youkei 4
Paper type Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Labels, Bond, Recycled, Vellum, Rough,
Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Envelope, Cardstock, Thick, High Quality, and
CUSTOM 1 (to 8)
Paper capacity 2,000 sheets (75 g/m
2
)
Noise (Lwad)
P-4531DN: 70 dB(A)
P-5031DN: 71 dB(A)
P-5531DN: 72 dB(A)
P-6031DN: 72 dB(A)
(At feeding the standard size paper)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 345 × 420 × 371 mm
13 37/64 × 13 17/32 × 14 39/64"
Weight 7.5 kg or less (16.54 lbs or less)
Item
Description
HD-6 HD-7
Capacity 32 GB 128 GB
Power supply From the machine
Appendix
A-26
Network Interface Kit (IB-50) (Option)
Item Description
CPU SoC 88F6180
RAM 64 MBytes
Flash ROM 16 MBytes
Connectors 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T
Printer interface eKUIO (5.0V)
Operating system Windows XP (32bit/64bit) / Vista (32bit/64bit) / 7 (32bit/64bit) /
Server 2003 (32bit/64bit) / Server 2008 (32bit/64bit)
NetWare 3.x. / 4.x. / 5.x. / 6.x
MacOS 9.x / Mac OS X (PowerPC: Ver 10.3.x-Ver 10.5.5 /
Intel: Ver 10.4.4-Ver 10.7.x)
UNIX
Network protocols IPv6 Apple Bonjour Compatible, DHCPv6, DNSv6, FTP, FTPS,
HTTP, HTTPS, ICMPv6, IKEv1, IPP, IPPS, Kerberos, LDAP,
LPD, POP3, RawPort, SLP, SMTP, SNMP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
SNTP, ThinPrint
IPv4 Apple Bonjour Compatible, BOOTP, DHCP, DNS, FTP, FTPS,
HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP, IPP, IPPS, KCP, Kerberos, LDAP, LPD,
NetBIOS over TCP/IP, POP3, POP3 over SSL, RawPort, SLP,
SMTP, SNMP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, SNTP, ThinPrint, WINS
Other AppleTalk, IPX/SPX, LLTD, NetBEUI, NetWare (NDS/Bindery)
Security protocols EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, IKE, PEAP, SNMPv3, SSL/
TLS (HTTPS)
Operating conditions 0 to 70°C, 20 to 80 % RH, no condensation
Storage conditions -20 to 50°C, 20 to 90 % RH, no condensation
EMI conformity FCC Class B (USA), CE (EU), VCCI Class B (Japan)
A-27
Appendix
Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) (Option)
Item Description
CPU SoC 88F6180
RAM 64 MBytes
ROM 16 MBytes
Wireless network
interface
IEEE802.11b Frequency 2.4GHz
Transmission
system
DS-SS
Transmission
speed
1 / 2 / 5.5 / 11 (Mbps)
Channel 1-11ch
IEEE802.11g Frequency 2.4GHz
Transmission
system
OFDM
Transmission
speed
6 / 9 / 12 / 18 / 24 / 36 / 48 / 54 (Mbps)
Channel 1-11ch
IEEE802.11n Frequency 2.4GHz
Transmission
system
OFDM
Transmission
speed
Max 300Mbps
Channel 1-11ch
Authentication method Open System / Shard Key / WPA / WPA2
Encryption mode None / WEP (64bit / 128bit) / TKIP / AES
When running in IEEE 802.11n, only AES is supported.
Antenna Non-directional antenna × 2
Printer interface eKUIO (5.0V)
Operating system Windows XP (32bit/64bit) / Vista (32bit/64bit) / 7 (32bit/
64bit) / Server 2003 (32bit/64bit) / Server 2008 (32bit/64bit)
NetWare 3.x. / 4.x. / 5.x. / 6.x
MacOS 9.x / Mac OS X (PowerPC: Ver 10.3.x-Ver 10.5.5 /
Intel: Ver 10.4.4-Ver 10.7.x)
UNIX
Appendix
A-28
Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) (Option)
Parallel Interface Kit (IB-32B) (Option)
Network protocols IPv6 Apple Bonjour Compatible, DHCPv6, DNSv6, FTP, FTPS,
HTTP, HTTPS(IPPS), ICMPv6, IKEv1, IPP, IPPS, Kerberos,
LDAP, LPD, POP3, RawPort, SLP, SMTP, SNMP, SNMPv1/
v2c/v3, SNTP, ThinPrint
IPv4 Apple Bonjour Compatible, BOOTP, DHCP, DNS, FTP,
FTPS, HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP, IPP, IPPS, KCP, Kerberos,
LDAP, LPD, NetBIOS over TCP/IP, POP3, POP3 over SSL,
RawPort, SLP, SMTP, SNMP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, SNTP,
ThinPrint, WINS
Other AppleTalk, IPX/SPX, LLTD, NetBEUI, NetWare (NDS/
Bindery)
Security protocols EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, IKE, PEAP, SNMPv3,
SSL/TLS (HTTPS)
Operating conditions 0 to 60 °C, 20 to 80 % RH, no condensation
Storage conditions -20 to 50 °C, 20 to 90 % RH, no condensation
EMI conformity FCC Class B (USA), CE (EU), VCCI Class B (Japan)
Item Description
Item Description
Installation Environment Conforms to the machine’s installation environment
Interface Wireless Network Interface × 1 (IEEE802.11n compliant)
Power supply From the machine
Item Description
Installation Environment Conforms to the machine’s installation environment
Interface Parallel Interface × 1 (IEEE-1284 compliant)
Power supply From the machine
A-29
Appendix
Environmental Specifications
Item Description
Time to Sleep mode (default setting) 1 minute
Recovery time from Sleep mode P-4531DN: 15 seconds or less
P-5031DN: 20 seconds or less
P-5531DN: 25 seconds or less
P-6031DN: 25 seconds or less
Duplexing Standard
Paper supply capability 100% recycled paper may be used.
Note Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
Appendix
A-30
Glossary-1
Glossary
Additional memory
An additional memory (optional) is used for increasing the memory capacity of this machine. For DIMM that can be used in
this machine, contact your service technician.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another
computer on the same AppleTalk network.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP requires
a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0 to
169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and
services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically
recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives
network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that
Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run
stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are
accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for
Bonjour.
Custom Box
The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or
multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.
DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System)
A Dynamic Domain Name System (DDNS) is a system for providing a fixed host name for IP addresses which change
dynamically.
By updating the correspondence between the host name registered and the IP address as the IP address changes, it is
possible to connect with the same host name even when the IP address has changed.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, which serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address, data
is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client
computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.
dpi (dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint
This is a printing mode that reduces toner consumption. Pages printed in the EcoPrint mode are lighter than pages printed
in the normal mode.
Glossary
Glossary-2
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages.
Form Feed Timeout
While data is being sent to a printer, some pauses may occur. At this time, the printer waits for the next data without making
a page break. Form feed timeout is a function to wait only a preset amount of time before it executes an automatic page
break. After the waiting period begins, once the designated amount of time is exceeded, the printer will automatically
process the currently received data and print it out. If the machine has received no print data for the last page, the printer
ends processing of that job without outputting paper.
IP Address (Internet Protocol Address)
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network. The
format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be between
0 and 255.
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent
between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables
printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms
along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
Job Box
The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data
later using the printer's operation panel.
KPDL
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller
networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to
choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a
standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
NetWare
Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.
Outline font
With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced in
different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts, since
the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in steps of
0.25 points up to 999.75 points.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional graphics,
allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that enabled color
Glossary-3
Glossary
printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access
and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.
PPM (Prints Per Minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is contained
in the Product Library disk enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.
RA (Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information is
the Router Advertisement (RA). ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is an IPv6 standard defined in
the RFC 2463 "Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
SD/SDHC Memory Card
An SD Memory Card is a removable storage media. It is nonvolatile semiconductor memory where the data remains even
when the power supply is cut. The maximum memory capacity is 2 GB.
SDHC memory cards are a higher specification of SD memory cards. These memory cards have bigger capacities than SD
memory cards and have a guaranteed minimum transfer speed.
As the file system was changed to FAT32, up to a maximum of 32 GB is supported.
Sleep mode
This mode is provided to save power. It is activated when the machine is not used for a preset period of time. In this mode,
power is reduced to the minimum. The default setting can be changed.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as
well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
SSD (Solid State Drive)
An SSD is a media for data storage using flash memory.
Whereas HDD generally use magnetic discs as the storage media, SDD are a storage media which use semiconductors.
Compared with HDD, on which a head reads from the magnetic disk, the merits of SSD are that they can read data at higher
speeds, they are resistant to vibrations, and they do not require motors, which mean that they consume less electricity and
there is no drive noise.
Status page
This lists machine conditions, such as the machine’s memory, the total number of prints and paper source settings. You can
print the status page from the operation panel.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask represents all
network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of
the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and, in this context, indicates the first
section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length
after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP
address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host
address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure
to set the DHCP setting to Off.
Glossary
Glossary-4
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over
a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
An interface standard for low to middle speed serial interfaces. This printer supports Hi-Speed USB. The maximum transfer
rate is 480 Mbps and the maximum cable length is 5 meters (16 feet).
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
WPS is a network security standard created by Wi-Fi Alliance, to make it easy to connect with the wireless devices and set
up the Wi-Fi Protected Access. The WPS-supported services can connect to the wireless access points by pushing a button
or entering passphrases.
Index-1
Index
A
Administrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Alternative Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Anti-theft Lock Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Auto Cassette Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Auto-IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
B
Bonjour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Bulk Paper Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Bulk paper feeder
clearing paper jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Buzzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
C
Canceling a Printing Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 4-4
Card Authentication Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Cassette (1 to 5) Settings
Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Paper weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Cassette 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Cleaning
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Clearing paper jams
bulk paper feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Duplex unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Inside the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
MP tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Paper cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Paper feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Rear unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Code Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Colored Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
CR Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Printer driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Custom Paper Size
Duplex printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Paper weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
D
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Security password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
SSD initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Data Security Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Date Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
DDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Developer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
DHCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Display Status/Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Document Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Document Box Default Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Duplex Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Duplex Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Binding modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Permitted with custom paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Duplex Unit
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
E
EcoPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Embedded Web Server RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Error report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Energy Star Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Duplex paper error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
InsertMismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
MP tray empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Paper mismatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Expansion Memory Module
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
F
Faceup Output Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fuser Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
I
ID Card Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Indicator
Attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-3
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-3
Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-3
Inside the Printer
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Installing the Printer Driver
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Interface Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
J
Job Account Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Job Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Auto sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Index-2
Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Personal information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Send history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Job Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Job Retention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Private print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Proof-and-Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Quick copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Stored job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
K
Key
[Back] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-4
[Cancel] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-4
[Clear] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-5
[Document Box] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-5
[Left Select] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-6
[Logout] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-4
[Menu] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-4
[OK] key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-5
[Right Select] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-6
Arrow keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-5
Numeric keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-5
KIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
L
Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Left Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Limited Use of This Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xii
M
Machine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150, 7-1
Quiet mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Memory
Checking expansion memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Expansion memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-2
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Online help messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Status information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Mode Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Moving Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
MP (Multi-Purpose) Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Media type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Paper feed source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
MP Tray Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
N
NetBEUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-2
Network
Auto-IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
DHCPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
IPv4 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
IPv6 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
LAN Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Primary Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
RA(Stateless) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Restart Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70, 4-81
Subnet Mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
TCP/IP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
TCP/IP(IPv6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Wired Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Network Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Network Interface Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 4-60
Bonjour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Enhanced WSD(SSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
EnhancedWSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
FTP (Server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
HTTPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
IPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
IPP Over SSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
IPSec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
LPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
NetBEUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
POP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
RAW Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
SNMPv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
ThinPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Wi-Fi Direct settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
WSD-PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
O
Online Help Messages
For clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 1-5
Option
Card authentication kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Expansion memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Faceup output tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Network interface kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Paper feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Parallel interface kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
SD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5, A-7
SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
USB flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Wireless network interface kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Option Interface Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Optional Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
IPSec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
LAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77, 4-91
Index-3
MAC address filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Netware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
TCP/IP settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69, 4-89
Wireless network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Other Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
P
Page Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Paper
Colored paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Loading envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Loading paper into the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Loading paper into the MP tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Media Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37, 4-38
Media type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31, 4-39
Minimum and maximum paper sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Other paper properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Paper availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Paper Setup Msg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Paper sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30, 4-32, 4-34, A-13
Paper thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Postcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Preprinted paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Recycled paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Resets customized settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Special paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Thick paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Paper Cassette
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Loading paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Non-standard paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Paper feed source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Paper Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Standard paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Paper Feed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Paper Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Loading paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Paper feed source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32, 4-33, 4-34
Paper Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Paper Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Paper Size Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Paper Stopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 2-45
Parallel Interface Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
PIN Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Postcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Power Cord Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Power Cord Connector Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Preprinted Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Print Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Print Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Printer Driver Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Prolonged Non-Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Q
Quiet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
R
RAM Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Rear Unit
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Recycled Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Reduced Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Report Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
S
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-3
Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
I/F block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . -xi
Service Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7, Glossary-3
Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Status Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Job log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Job status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Option network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
USB keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
T
Thick Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
ThinPrint Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
TIFF/JPEG Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Auto error clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Auto panel reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Error clear timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Form feed timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Panel reset timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Ping Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Power off rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Power off timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Sleep level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Index-4
Sleep timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Timer settings
WeeklyTimer Set.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Toner Alert Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Toner Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Toner Container Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Toner Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Top Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-2
U
Uninstalling Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
USB Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
USB Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
USB KeyboardType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
USB Memory Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
User Login Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
User Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
W
Waste Toner Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
WeeklyTimer Set.
Retry Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Weekly Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Wide A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Wi-Fi Direct
ConnectionStatus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Detail Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
PushButton Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Wi-Fi Direct Set
Auto Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Device Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Disconnect Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Wi-Fi Settings
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Wireless Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xi
Wireless Network Interface Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7, A-8
X
XPS Fit to Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Z
??????
?????? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
??????
Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
????????? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
First edition 2016.8
2T6GEEN000
TA Triumph-Adler GmbH
Betriebsstätte Norderstedt
Ohechaussee 235
22848 Norderstedt
Germany
… 324 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Triumph-Adler P-4531DN at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Triumph-Adler P-4531DN in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 8,95 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Triumph-Adler P-4531DN

Triumph-Adler P-4531DN User Manual - German - 386 pages

Triumph-Adler P-4531DN User Manual - Dutch - 143 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info